Nortel Networks 553-3001-211 manual

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896

Go to page of

A good user manual

The rules should oblige the seller to give the purchaser an operating instrucion of Nortel Networks 553-3001-211, along with an item. The lack of an instruction or false information given to customer shall constitute grounds to apply for a complaint because of nonconformity of goods with the contract. In accordance with the law, a customer can receive an instruction in non-paper form; lately graphic and electronic forms of the manuals, as well as instructional videos have been majorly used. A necessary precondition for this is the unmistakable, legible character of an instruction.

What is an instruction?

The term originates from the Latin word „instructio”, which means organizing. Therefore, in an instruction of Nortel Networks 553-3001-211 one could find a process description. An instruction's purpose is to teach, to ease the start-up and an item's use or performance of certain activities. An instruction is a compilation of information about an item/a service, it is a clue.

Unfortunately, only a few customers devote their time to read an instruction of Nortel Networks 553-3001-211. A good user manual introduces us to a number of additional functionalities of the purchased item, and also helps us to avoid the formation of most of the defects.

What should a perfect user manual contain?

First and foremost, an user manual of Nortel Networks 553-3001-211 should contain:
- informations concerning technical data of Nortel Networks 553-3001-211
- name of the manufacturer and a year of construction of the Nortel Networks 553-3001-211 item
- rules of operation, control and maintenance of the Nortel Networks 553-3001-211 item
- safety signs and mark certificates which confirm compatibility with appropriate standards

Why don't we read the manuals?

Usually it results from the lack of time and certainty about functionalities of purchased items. Unfortunately, networking and start-up of Nortel Networks 553-3001-211 alone are not enough. An instruction contains a number of clues concerning respective functionalities, safety rules, maintenance methods (what means should be used), eventual defects of Nortel Networks 553-3001-211, and methods of problem resolution. Eventually, when one still can't find the answer to his problems, he will be directed to the Nortel Networks service. Lately animated manuals and instructional videos are quite popular among customers. These kinds of user manuals are effective; they assure that a customer will familiarize himself with the whole material, and won't skip complicated, technical information of Nortel Networks 553-3001-211.

Why one should read the manuals?

It is mostly in the manuals where we will find the details concerning construction and possibility of the Nortel Networks 553-3001-211 item, and its use of respective accessory, as well as information concerning all the functions and facilities.

After a successful purchase of an item one should find a moment and get to know with every part of an instruction. Currently the manuals are carefully prearranged and translated, so they could be fully understood by its users. The manuals will serve as an informational aid.

Table of contents for the manual

  • Page 1

    Nortel Networks Commu nication Server 1000 Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000 Release 4.0 Circuit Card Description and Installation Document Number: 553-3001-211 Document Release: Standard 2.00 Date: September 2004 Y ear Publish FCC TM Copyright © 2003—2004 Nor tel Networks All Rights Reserved Produced in Canada Information is subject to [...]

  • Page 2

    [...]

  • Page 3

    Page 3 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 4 Revision history September 2004 Standard 2.00. This document is up-issued for Commu nication Server 1000 Release 4.0. October 2003 Standard 1.00. This document is a new NTP for Succession 3.0. It was created to support a restructuring of the Documentat ion Library, which resulted in the mer[...]

  • Page 4

    Page 4 of 894 Revision history 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 5

    Page 5 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 18 Contents About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Applicable systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20[...]

  • Page 6

    Page 6 of 894 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Conference cards .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Digitone receiver cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 7

    Contents Page 7 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC559, QPC560 Loo p Signaling Trunk card s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 QPC471 Clock Controller card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 QPC525, QPC526, QPC527,[...]

  • Page 8

    Page 8 of 894 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Installation and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2[...]

  • Page 9

    Contents Page 9 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Appl[...]

  • Page 10

    Page 10 of 894 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Replacing MSDL cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Symptoms and actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 11

    Contents Page 11 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Digital line interface specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 12

    Page 12 of 894 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 Connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 13

    Contents Page 13 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation NTAK02 SDI/DCH card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 14

    Page 14 of 894 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 15

    Contents Page 15 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Physical description .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 16

    Page 16 of 894 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Hardware architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829 Functional description .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 Survivability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 17

    Contents Page 17 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 18

    Page 18 of 894 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 19

    Page 19 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 24 About this document This document is a global document. Co ntact your system supplier or your Nortel Networks representative to verify that the hardware and software described are supported in your area. Subject This document outlines the functions , specifications, applications, and opera[...]

  • Page 20

    Page 20 of 894 About this document 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 information about system messages, see the Software Input/Output: System Messages (553-3001-411). Note on legacy products and relea ses This NTP contains information about sy stems, components, and features that are compatible with Nortel Ne tworks Communi cation Server 10[...]

  • Page 21

    About this document Page 21 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: When upgrading software, memory upgrades m ay be required on the Signaling Server, the Call Se rver, or both. Intended audience This document is in tended for individu als responsible fo r maintaining Internet Enabled systems. Conventions Terminology In this document[...]

  • Page 22

    Page 22 of 894 About this document 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 •M e r i d i a n 1 P B X 8 1 • Meridian 1 PBX 81C • Meridian 1 PBX 81C CP PII Related information This section lists information so urces that relate to this document . NTPs The following NTPs are referenced in this document: • Meridian L ink ISDN/AP General G uide[...]

  • Page 23

    About this document Page 23 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Online To access Nortel Networks do cumentation online, click the Technical Documentation link under Support on the Nortel Networks home page: http://www.n ortelnetworks.com/ CD-ROM To obtain Nortel Networks documentation on CD-ROM, contact your Nortel Networks customer re[...]

  • Page 24

    Page 24 of 894 About this document 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 25

    Page 25 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 76 Overview Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Line cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 [...]

  • Page 26

    Page 26 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Line cards The following line cards are designed using th e Intelligent Per ipheral Equipment (IPE) arch itecture and are recommended for use in all new system designs. Each of the line cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Table 1 lists the line card characteristics. Ta [...]

  • Page 27

    Overview Page 27 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT1R20 Off-Premise Stati on Analog Line card The NT1R20 Off-Premise St ation (OPS) Analog Line card is an intelligent eight-channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-w ire analog terminal equipment such as anal og (500/2500-type) tel ephones and analog modems. Each line has[...]

  • Page 28

    Page 28 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NT8D09 analog message wai ting line card The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is an i ntelligent 16-channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-wire terminal equipment such as analog (500/2500-ty pe) telephones, modems, an d key systems. This card can also provide a hi[...]

  • Page 29

    Overview Page 29 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation When installing line cards, follow these general procedures: • Configure the jumpers and switch es on the line card (if any) to meet system needs. • Install the line card into the selected slot. • Install the cable that connects th e backplane connector on the IPE module to the[...]

  • Page 30

    Page 30 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • configure the card according to inst ructions issued by the system • report back to the system information such as car d identificat ion (type, vintage, and serial number), fi rmware version, and programmed configuration status) Intelligent Peripher al Equipment IPE line cards [...]

  • Page 31

    Overview Page 31 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • ringing signal on/off • message waiting lamp on/off Maintenance data is data relating to the setup and operation of the IPE card, and is carried on the card LAN link. So me examples of main tenance data include: • polling • reporting of self-test status • CP initiated car[...]

  • Page 32

    Page 32 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 2 Typical IPE analog line card architecture Input/ output interface control Codec PCM Micro- controller DS-30X interface 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM Async card LAN link Front panel LED Card LAN interface Tip Ring Codec PCM Line interface unit power Rx PCM 1 kHz frame sync Card slot [...]

  • Page 33

    Overview Page 33 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation DS-30X loops The line interfaces provided by the line cards connect to conventional 2-wire (tip and ring) line facilities. IPE anal og line cards conv ert the inco ming analog voice and signaling in formation to digit al form and rou te it to the Call Server over DS-30X network loops[...]

  • Page 34

    Page 34 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 DS-30Y network loops extend between controll er cards and superloop network cards in the Common Equipment (CE). Th ey function in a manner similar to DS-30X loop s. See Figure 5 on page 39 . A DS-30Y loop carries the PCM timeslo t traffic of a DS-30X loop. Four DS-30Y network loop s [...]

  • Page 35

    Overview Page 35 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation A card LAN link bus is common to all of the line/trunk card slots within an IPE module. This bu s is arranged in a master/s lave configuratio n where the controller card is the master and al l other cards are slaves. The module backplane provides each line/trunk card slot with a uniq[...]

  • Page 36

    Page 36 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 4 Typical analog line inte rface unit block diagram CODEC 2-wire to 4-wire conversion Line interface and protection Message waiting Variable gain filters Impedance matching transformer Balancing Network Tip Ring DS-30X or SL-1 network loop Message waiting circuit –150V dc 55[...]

  • Page 37

    Overview Page 37 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Coder/Decoder circuit The Coder/Decoder (CODEC) performs Analog to Di gital (A/D) and Digital to Analog (D/A) conversion of the line analog voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either the A-Law or the µ-Law compandin g algorit[...]

  • Page 38

    Page 38 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 (nominal) ri nging voltag e power supply is used to prevent switching of the relay during the current peak. This el iminates switching glitch es and extends the life of the switching relay. The off-hook detection circuit monito rs the current draw on the phone line. When the current [...]

  • Page 39

    Overview Page 39 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation voltage protection between th e TCM loop and the digita l line interf ace circuit. It also provides power for the digital telepho ne. To prevent undesirable side effects from occurring when the TCM loop interface cannot provide the proper si gnals on the digital phone line, the syste[...]

  • Page 40

    Page 40 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 the system controller to operate the digi tal line interface circ uits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signa ling messages from the controller and return incoming cal l status information to the controller over the DS-30X network loop. Analog line call operation The [...]

  • Page 41

    Overview Page 41 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 6 Call connection sequence – near -end station receiving call 553-AAA1113 High- resistance loop Line card unit idle (2-way voice connection) Remarks Ground on tip/ battery on ring Signal/direction State System Ground on tip/ battery on ring High-resistance loop Ground on tip[...]

  • Page 42

    Page 42 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 7 Call connection sequence – near-end originating call 553-AAA1114 High- resistance loop Line card unit idle (2-way voice connection) Remarks Ground on tip/ battery on ring Signal/direction State System Ground on tip/ battery on ring High-resistance loop Ground on tip/ batte[...]

  • Page 43

    Overview Page 43 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Message wait ing Line cards that are equipped with the message waiting feature receive notification that a m essage is waiting across the C ard LAN link (IPE cards). On cards that drive a message waiting lig ht, the light is turned on by connecting the ring sid e of the telephone lin[...]

  • Page 44

    Page 44 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 causes the line card to revert th e battery and ground sign als to the normal stat e to signal that the call is complete. Hook Flash disconne ct supervision Hook flash disconnect supervisi on is only used for incoming calls that terminate at the terminal device (typi cally a Key syst[...]

  • Page 45

    Overview Page 45 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 8 Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision sequence System High- resistance loop Line card unit idle (2-way voice connection) Remarks Ground on tip/ battery on ring Signal/direction State Ground on tip/ battery on ring High- resistance loop Ground on tip/ battery on [...]

  • Page 46

    Page 46 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 9 Hook flash disconn ect supervision sequence High- resistance loop Line card unit idle (2-way voice connection) Remarks Ground on tip/ battery on ring Signal/direction State System No battery current drawn. Far-end station goes off hook and addresses (dials up) near-end stati[...]

  • Page 47

    Overview Page 47 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Call operation will be described by catego rizing the operation into th e following ma in states: • Idle (on-hook) • Incoming calls • Outgoing calls • Calls disconnected by the CO • Calls disconnected by the telephone Loop Start Mode In Loop Start mode , the A and B bits ha[...]

  • Page 48

    Page 48 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Outgoing calls During outgoing calls from the terminal equipment, a channel is seized when the station goes off-ho ok. This simulates a low- resistance loop across the ti p and ring leads toward the lineside T1 card, causing the lineside T1’s receive A bit to be changed from 0 to 1[...]

  • Page 49

    Overview Page 49 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • In order to detect distant end disc onnect for calls te rminating on the lineside T1 card, the hook flash feature within the SAL software must be enabled. • In order to detect distant end di sconnect for calls originating and terminating on the lineside T1 card, both the batter[...]

  • Page 50

    Page 50 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Ground Start Mode In ground start mode, the A and B bits have the followi ng meaning: Transmit from LTI:A bit = Tip ground (0=grounded, 1=not grounded ) B bit = Ringing (0=on, 1=off) Receive to LTI: A bit = Loop (0=open, 1=closed) B bit = Ring ground (0=grounded, 1=not groun ded) Whe[...]

  • Page 51

    Overview Page 51 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Incoming Calls Incoming calls to terminal equipm ent that is connected to the lineside T1 card can originate either from stations th at are local (served by the PBX), or remote (served through the publi c switched telephone network). To provide the ringing signal to the te rminal equ[...]

  • Page 52

    Page 52 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note: By default, the SAL feature o pens the tip side fo r 750 m/s in loop start operation. This is configurable in 10 m/s increments. • In order to detect di stant end disconnect for calls originating on the lineside T1 card, the “battery revers al” feature within the SAL soft[...]

  • Page 53

    Overview Page 53 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Ground Start Re strictions If the lineside T1 card is used in ground start mode, certain restrictions sho uld be considered. Because the system treat s the lineside T1 card as a standard loop start analog line card, the gro und start operation of the lineside T1 card has operational [...]

  • Page 54

    Page 54 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Distant end disconne ct restriction s If the SAL feature is not available in the CS 1000 Release 4.0 software, the lineside T1 card is not capable of indicating to the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) when a call has been term inated by the dist ant end. In this case, the lineside T1[...]

  • Page 55

    Overview Page 55 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Voice frequency audio level The digital pad for lineside T1 card audio level is fixed for all ty pes of call connection (0 dB insertion loss in both directions ), and differs from the analog line. Audio level adj ustments, if required, must be ma de in the lineside T1 terminal equipm[...]

  • Page 56

    Page 56 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Nortel Networks has tested line protect ion devices from th ree manufacturers. See Table 5. Each manufacturer offers de vices for protection of digital as well as analog telephone lines. These devices are compatible wi th 66 type M1-50 sp lit blocks or equival ent. Consult the device[...]

  • Page 57

    Overview Page 57 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation following the groundi ng connection requirement s as described in System installation (553-3 001-210). This requ irement includes connectin g the ground for the protection devices to the approved buildi ng earth ground reference. Any variances to these gr ounding requirements could l[...]

  • Page 58

    Page 58 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Each of the trunk cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Use Table 6 to help select the trunk card that will best m eet system needs. NT8D14 Univer sal Trunk card The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is an i ntelligent four-channel t runk card that is designed to be used in a v[...]

  • Page 59

    Overview Page 59 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The universal trunk card also supports Music, Automatic Wake Up, and Direct Inward System Access (DISA) features. NT8D15 E&M Trunk card The NT8D15 E&M Trunk card is an in telligent fou r-channel trunk card that is designed to be used when connecting to the following types of [...]

  • Page 60

    Page 60 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 3 Install the cable that connects th e backplane connector on the IPE module to the module I/O panel. 4 Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF). 5 Connect the trunk card output to the se lected terminal equipment at the MDF. 6 [...]

  • Page 61

    Overview Page 61 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Operation This section describes how trunk cards fit into the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 architecture, the buses that carry signals to and from the trunk cards, and how they connect to termin al equipment. See Table 7 for IPE parameters. Host interface bus Cards based on the [...]

  • Page 62

    Page 62 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 11 Typical IPE trunk card architecture Input/ output interface control Codec PCM Micro- controller DS-30X interface 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM Async card LAN link Front panel LED Card LAN interface Tip Ring Codec PCM Trunk interface unit power Rx PCM 1 kHz frame sync Card slot addr[...]

  • Page 63

    Overview Page 63 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The switch communicates with IPE modules over two separate interfaces. Voice and signaling data are sent and received over DS-30X loops and maintenance data is sent over a separate asynchronous com munication link called the card LAN link. Signaling data is infor mation directly re l[...]

  • Page 64

    Page 64 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 DS-30X loops The interfaces provided by the line an d trunk cards connect to conventional 2-wire (tip an d ring) line f acilities. IPE analog line and trunk cards convert the incoming analog voice and signali ng information to digital fo rm, and route it to the Common Equipment (CE) [...]

  • Page 65

    Overview Page 65 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation signaling data to the line card, it is sent as a 24-bit word divided amon g 24 successive DS-30X frames. DS-30Y network loops extend between controll er cards and superloop network cards in the common equipmen t, and function in a m anner similar to DS-30X loops. See Figure 13 on pag[...]

  • Page 66

    Page 66 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 13 Network conn ections to IPE mo dules NT8D04 Superloop Network Card NT8D01 Controller Card NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card DS-30X DS-30Y loop NT8D37 IPE Module Common Equipment (Network) NT8D13 PE Module NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card QPC414 Network Card QPC659 Dual-Loop Peripheral B[...]

  • Page 67

    Overview Page 67 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation link is composed of two asynchronou s serial buses (called the Async card LAN link in Figure 11 on page 62 ). The outpu t bus is used by the controller for output of control data to the trunk card. The input bus is used by the controller for input of trunk card stat us data. A card L[...]

  • Page 68

    Page 68 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 trunk line through an impedance mat c hing and balance network. The trunk interface also includes th e logic necessary to place outgoing call signaling onto the trunk, or the logic to co nnect to special services such as recorded announcement and pag ing equipment. Figure 14 shows a [...]

  • Page 69

    Overview Page 69 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Variable gain filt ers Audio signals received from the analog phone trunk are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic fi lter that limits the frequency spread of the input signal to a nominal 2 00–3400 Hz bandwidth. The audio signal is then appli ed to the input of the co dec. Aud[...]

  • Page 70

    Page 70 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board provides four bidirectional asynchronous serial ports for the system processor, and the QPC8 41 QSDI card also provides fou r. Any device th at conforms to the RS-232-C serial communication standard can be c onnected to[...]

  • Page 71

    Overview Page 71 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation not consume a mo dule slot. The RS-232-C connections are bro ught out through special cables to the backplane I/O panel. The QPC841 Quad SDI card and the QPC513 Enhanced SDI card mount in standard backplane slots, and their se rial interface connectors are located on the card front p[...]

  • Page 72

    Page 72 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 — Data terminal equipmen t (DTE) emulat ion mode — Data communication equipm ent (DCE) emulation mode • enable/disable switch and LED • input/output (I/O) device add ress selectable by on-board switches. The QPC513 ESDI card provides these features: • fully synchronous seri[...]

  • Page 73

    Overview Page 73 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power consumption The SDI cards obtain their power directly from the module backplane. Power consumption for each of the cards is shown in Table 9. Environmental The SDI cards operate without degradation under the condi tions listed in Table 10. Electrostatic di scharge The SDI cards[...]

  • Page 74

    Page 74 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Electromagneti c interference The CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 systems meet the requirements of FCC Part 15 and CSA C108.8 electromagnetic inte rference (EMI) standards as a class “A” computing device. To accomplish this, the SDI cables must exit the module through EMI filt[...]

  • Page 75

    Overview Page 75 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The following maintenance pro gram is used to maintain individu al SDI synchronous ports. • LD 48 Link Diagnostic – For checkin g Automatic Call Distributio n (ACD) and Meridian Link ports. Instructions for runni ng the various maintenance pro grams are found in Software Input/Ou[...]

  • Page 76

    Page 76 of 894 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 77

    Page 77 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 86 Circuit card installation Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Card slots — Large System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Circuit card installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 78

    Page 78 of 894 Circuit card installation 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Circuit card installation Ta b l e 1 1 Large System card slots (P art 1 of 4) Component Large System A0786611 Call Processor P entium II ® card 81C Core/Net: “CP” A0810486 Call Processor P entium II 81C Core/Net: “CP” NT1P61 Fiber Superlo op Network card Cor[...]

  • Page 79

    Circuit card installation Page 79 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5K18 Central Office T r unk card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT5K19 E&M T runk card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT5K35 D-channel Handler Interface Core/Net: 0-7 Net: 5-12 NT5K36 Direct Inward/Direct Outward Dial T runk card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT5[...]

  • Page 80

    Page 80 of 894 Circuit card installation 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NT6D73 Multi-pur pose ISDN Signaling Processor card Core/Net: 0–7 NT6D80 MSDL Core/Net: 0–7 NT7D16 Data Access card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT7R51 Local Carr ier Interface Core/Net: 0–7 NT8D01 Controller card IPE: “Contr” NT8D02 Digital Line card IPE:[...]

  • Page 81

    Circuit card installation Page 81 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation NTRE39 Optical Cable Management card F or 81C: Net module: the slot to the right side of 1 4, the slot to the left of the 3PE in slot 1 QPC43 P eripheral Signaling card Core/Net: 10 Net: 4 QPC71 E&M/DX T r unk card IPE: any slot but “Contr” QPC414 Network car[...]

  • Page 82

    Page 82 of 894 Circuit card installation 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Precautions To avoid personal i njury and equipm ent damage, review the following guidelines before handl ing system equipment . To avoid damage to circuit cards from static discharge, wear a properly connected antistatic wrist strap when you work on system equipment[...]

  • Page 83

    Circuit card installation Page 83 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • Keep cards installed in the system as much as possible to avoid dirty contacts and unnecessary wear. • Store cards in a cool, dry, dust-free area. During repair and maintenance procedures do the followin g: • Turn off the circuit breaker or switch for a modul[...]

  • Page 84

    Page 84 of 894 Circuit card installation 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • Hardware disable cards, whenever th ere is an enable/dis able switch, before they are removed or i nserted. • Return defective or heavily contaminated cards to a repair center. Do not try to repair or clean them. Installing a circuit card This procedure provide[...]

  • Page 85

    Circuit card installation Page 85 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 7 Insert the card into the card aligning gu ides in the card cage. Gently push the card into the slot until you feel re sistance. The tip of the locking device must be behind the edge of the card cage (see Figure 1 6). 8 Lock the card into position by si multaneously[...]

  • Page 86

    Page 86 of 894 Circuit card installation 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 9 If there is an enable/disable switch, set it to Enb. Note: Do not enable the switch on an NT8D04 Superloop Network card or QPC414 Network card until network loop cables are installe d. 10 If you are adding a voice, conference, o r tone and di git loop, press the ma[...]

  • Page 87

    Page 87 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 98 Acceptance tests Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Conference cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 88

    Page 88 of 894 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Conference cards Procedure 2 T esting conference car ds Use this procedure to test a conference ca rd or to test the confer ence function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Request the status of a lo op on the conference card: LD 38 STA[...]

  • Page 89

    Acceptance tests Page 89 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 4 Test the conference loop for c hann el, group, and switching faults: CNFC loop If the conference loop passe s the tests, the output is OK . If the system response is other than OK , see the Software Input/ Output: Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages. 5 Pre[...]

  • Page 90

    Page 90 of 894 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Again, see “LD 38 ” in the Software Input/Outp ut: Maintenance (553-3001-511) for detaile d information on using this command. 7 End the session in LD 38: **** End of Procedure Digitone receiver cards Procedure 3 T esting digitone r eceiver cards Use this procedure to tes[...]

  • Page 91

    Acceptance tests Page 91 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Line cards Procedure 4 T esting line cards Use this procedure to test a line card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Perform a network memory test, continuity test, and signali ng test on a specific loop and shelf: LD 30 SHLF l s loop and shelf numbers If the system re[...]

  • Page 92

    Page 92 of 894 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Multifrequency sender cards Procedure 5 T esting multifrequency sender cards Use this procedure to test a multif requency sender (MFS) ca rd or the MFS function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Test and enable an MFS loop: LD 46 MFS l[...]

  • Page 93

    Acceptance tests Page 93 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Multifrequency signaling cards Procedure 6 T esting multifrequenc y signaling car ds Use this procedure to test a multifrequency signaling card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Test and enable the sp ecified unit: LD 54 ATST l s c u loop, shelf, card, and unit number[...]

  • Page 94

    Page 94 of 894 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 3 End the session in LD 30: **** End of Procedure Trunk cards Use the following procedur es to test a trunk card. Procedure 8 T esting a trunk card using a maintenance telephone 1 Access the system from a maintenan ce telephone. See “Communicating with the Meridian 1” in [...]

  • Page 95

    Acceptance tests Page 95 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation When you see the DN? prompt, enter th e director y number (DN) you wa nt the system to dial. If the system response is other than OK , see the Software Input/ Output: Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages. 4 End the session in LD 36: **** 5 Test an automati ca[...]

  • Page 96

    Page 96 of 894 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 For other than an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter: ENLL loop 4 Test the TDS loop: TDS loop If the system response is other than OK , see the Software Inpu t/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages. 5 End the session in LD 34: **** 6 Using a maintenance[...]

  • Page 97

    Acceptance tests Page 97 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation RNG#loop## 764#loop## Provides r ing tone from TDS loop specified. **** Exits TDS test program. T abl e 12 TDS tone tests[...]

  • Page 98

    Page 98 of 894 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 99

    Page 99 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 154 Option settings Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Circuit card grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Genera[...]

  • Page 100

    Page 100 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 QPC471 Clock Controller card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Tr unk card . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 QPC550 Direct Inward [...]

  • Page 101

    Option settings Page 101 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Throughout this d ocument, if neither ON nor OFF is given (t here is a blank space) for a position on a switch, that pos ition may be set to either ON or OFF because it has no function for the option described. Figure 17 Circuit card grid S4 (switch 4 at coordinate B11) S8 (s[...]

  • Page 102

    Page 102 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card Table 13 lists op tion settings for t he NT1R20 Off-Premis e Station analog card. Ta b l e 1 3 OPS analog line card configuration (P ar t 1 of 3) Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of Serv ice (CLS) (Note 1) ON[...]

  • Page 103

    Option settings Page 103 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Loop loss (dB) (Note 3) 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 > 2.5–3.0 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–4.5 >4.5–15 TIMP (Notes 1, 4) 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms T abl e 13 OPS analog line card configuration (P ar t 2 of 3) Application On-premise [...]

  • Page 104

    Page 104 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 BIMP (Notes 1, 4) 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 3CO M2 Gain treatment (Note 5) No Ye s Ta b l e 1 3 OPS analog line card configuration (P ar t 3 of 3) Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of Serv ice (CLS) (Note 1) ONP OPX Note 1: C[...]

  • Page 105

    Option settings Page 105 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5D12AA Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card Switch setting tables for this card are li sted in subsection s according to their function. Bold font designates factory (defau l t) settings. General purpose switches Use switch set SW9 for Trunk 0; use switch set SW15 for Trunk 1 (see Table[...]

  • Page 106

    Page 106 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 A set of three switches provides select ion of dB val ues. Use SW5, SW6, and SW7 for Trunk 0; use SW11, SW12, and SW13 for Trunk 1 (see Table 16). A set of four DIP switches provides se lection among three values for receiver impedance. Use SW8 for Trunk 0; use SW14 for Trun [...]

  • Page 107

    Option settings Page 107 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Ring ground switches A set of four DIP switches selects wh ich Ring lines are connected to ground (see Table 18). T abl e 18 Ring gr ound s witch settings Switch Description S2 switch setting 1 T run k 0 T ransmit off - Ring lin e is not grounded on- Ring line is grounded 2 T[...]

  • Page 108

    Page 108 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 DCH mode and address select switches One switch selects an on-board NTBK 51AA D-Channel dau ghterboard and an external MSDL/DCHI card. Fo ur other switches provide th e daughterboard address (see Table 19). T abl e 19 DCH mode and address select switch settings Switch Descrip[...]

  • Page 109

    Option settings Page 109 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Illustrations of switch locatio ns and settings Figure 18 on page 110 displays functional areas for switches on the NT5D12AA DDP card. 9 on off off on 10 off on off on 11 on on off on 12 off off on on 13 on off on on 14 off on on on 15 on on on on Note 1: The maximum n umber [...]

  • Page 110

    Page 110 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 18 Switch functions and areas J5 J6 Port 0 Port 1 S3 S2 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 General Purpose Switches Receiver Impedence Line Build Out Switches Transmission Mode DCH Mode and Address Select DDP Faceplate 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 553[...]

  • Page 111

    Option settings Page 111 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 19 displays default settings for switches on the NT5D12AA DDP card. Figure 19 Switch default settings J5 J6 S2 S9 S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S10 S11 S12 S13 S1 4 S15 S3 o n o n o n o n 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 553-7309[...]

  • Page 112

    Page 112 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC Tables 21 through 2 6 list option setting s for the NT6D42 Ring ing Generator. Ta b l e 2 1 NT6D42 recommended options for North America n and British T ele com Application Ringing frequency Ringing vo l t a g e Jumper location s Ringing outpu t No[...]

  • Page 113

    Option settings Page 113 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 24 NT6D42 SW1 Ringing frequenc y (Hz) Po s i t i o n S W 1 20 1 25 2 50 3 T abl e 25 NT6D42CB SW2 SW2 Ringing vol ta g e Message waiting vol ta g e 1234 86 V ac –120 V dc off off off off 86 V ac –150 V dc off off off on 80 V ac –120 V dc on off off off 80 V ac ?[...]

  • Page 114

    Page 114 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Ta b l e 2 6 NT6D42CC SW2 SW2 Ringing vol ta g e Message waiting vol ta g e 1234 86 V ac –100 V dc off off off off 86 V ac –150 V dc off off off on 80 V ac –100 V dc on off off off 80 V ac –150 V dc on off off on 75 V ac –100 V dc off on off off 75 V ac –150 V dc [...]

  • Page 115

    Option settings Page 115 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane NT6D68 Core module backplane T abl e 27 NT5D2101/NT9D110 2 Core/Net work module backplane Jum p er Location (between slots) Core/Network 1 Core/Network 0 JB1 14/15 Jumper plug not installed Plug installed Note: Berg jumper is lo[...]

  • Page 116

    Page 116 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NT6D80 Multi-purpose Se rial Data Link card Ta b l e 2 9 NT6D80 Multi-purpose Seri al Data Link card Po r t 0 — S W 4 Por t 0 — S W 8 RS-232-D DTE or DCE* RS-422-A DTE (ter minal) RS-422-A DCE (modem) all off all off all on all off all on all off Po r t 1 — S W 3 Por t [...]

  • Page 117

    Option settings Page 117 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Tables 30 through 34 list opti on settings for the NT8D14 Univ ersal Trunk card. T abl e 30 NT8D14 vintage AA jumper strap se ttings Modes Locatio n Jum p er s t r a p Central Office (CO) J1, J2 off 2-wa y tie trunk (loop dial repeat) J1, J2 off 2-[...]

  • Page 118

    Page 118 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Ta b l e 3 1 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings—factory standard T runk type s Loop length Jumper strap settings J1.X J2.X J3.X J4 .X CO/FX/W A TS Zero–1524 m (5000 ft) Off Off 1–2 1–2 2-wa y tie (LDR) 2-wa y tie (O AID) DID Zero–600 ohms RAN: continuous op[...]

  • Page 119

    Option settings Page 119 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 32 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings—extended range T runk type s Loop length Jumper strap settings J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X CO/FX/W A TS > 1524 m (5000 ft) Off Off 1–2 2–3 2-wa y tie (LDR) 2-wa y tie (O AID) DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2– 3 RAN: pul[...]

  • Page 120

    Page 120 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 2-wa y tie (O AID) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 DID (loop < 600 ohms) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 DID (loop Š 600 ohms) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms N/A 3COM2 RAN: continuous operation mode 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A P aging 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A[...]

  • Page 121

    Option settings Page 121 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 34 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB cable loop resistan ce and l oss Cable length Cable loop resistance (ohms) Cable loop loss (dB) (non-loaded at 1kHz) 22 A WG 24 A W G 26 A WG 22 A WG 24 A WG 26 A WG 915 m (3000 ft) 97 155 251 0.9 1.2 1.5 1524 m (5000 ft) 162 260 417 1.6 2.0 2[...]

  • Page 122

    Page 122 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Ta b l e 3 5 NT8D15 E& M T runk ca rd Jum p e r (Note 1) Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk Ty p e I P aging Ty p e I T ype II DX tip & ring pair M—rcv M—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X off off off off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.[...]

  • Page 123

    Option settings Page 123 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT8D17 Conference/TDS card Switch and jumper settings are used to select the companding law and to change the conference attenuation PAD le vels. These PAD levels are used if prompt CPAD = 1 in LD97. The J1 connec tor on the faceplate is reserved for future use. You can enabl[...]

  • Page 124

    Page 124 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC Frequency Amplitude Settings P1 P2 P3 20 Hz 86 V ac open open 2–5 8–11 25 Hz 70 V ac open 1–4 7–10 open 25 Hz 80 V ac open 3–6 9–12 open 25 Hz 86 V ac open 2–5 8–11 open 50 Hz 70 V ac 1–4 7–10 open open 50 Hz 80 V ac 3–6 9–1[...]

  • Page 125

    Option settings Page 125 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT8D22 System Monitor The master system monitor, located in the column wi th CP 0, must be numbered 0. Slave system monitors are numbered from 1 to 63. For examples of system monito r option settings in basic configuration s, see “Sample settings for NT 8D22 System Monitors[...]

  • Page 126

    Page 126 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Configure the system monito r in Remote Peripheral Equipment (R PE) columns as slaves. There is no serial connection be tween RPE columns. Ta b l e 3 6 NT8D22 SW1 SW1 function Po s i t i o n 12345678 Not used Meridian 1 columns only on off P osition 1 is OFF (Meridian 1 colum[...]

  • Page 127

    Option settings Page 127 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 37 NT8D22 SW2 SW2 indication Po s i t i o n 12345678 Master system monitor Slav e system monitor on off Not used All other operation on off F or master , indi cates total number of slav es Set 3–8 according to the T able 39 on page 128 . F or each slav e, indicates [...]

  • Page 128

    Page 128 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Ta b l e 3 9 NT8D22 settings fo r total numb er of sla ves—SW2 on master How man y slave units Switch positi on How man y slave units Switch positi on 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 on on on on on on 32 off on on on on on 1 on on on on on off 33 off on on on on off 2 on on on on[...]

  • Page 129

    Option settings Page 129 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 40 NT8D22 slave address—SW2 on slave Slave unit address Po s i t i o n Slave unit addr ess Po s i t i o n 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 on on on on on off 33 off on on on on off 2 on on on on off on 34 off on on on off on 3 on on on on off off 35 off on on on off off 4 [...]

  • Page 130

    Page 130 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Baud rate Switches SW13, SW10, SW 11, and SW12 determine the baud rate for ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See the settings for these switches in Table 41. * For future use . Address Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the car[...]

  • Page 131

    Option settings Page 131 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation both switches are show n in Table 42. To avoid system problems, switches SW15 and SW16 must not be configured identicall y. * T o enable por ts 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. T o enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON. + F or each X, the setting for this s witch[...]

  • Page 132

    Page 132 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface card The NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface car d allows the setting of interface impedance by way of DIP swit ches. Ta b l e 4 3 QSDI paddle board DTE/DCE mode switch settings Mode P ort 1 — SW 3 Po r t 1 — S W 2 123456123456 DTE (terminal) on on[...]

  • Page 133

    Option settings Page 133 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 20 NT8D72 DIP sw itch settings S1 S2 11 22 or 75 ohm switch setting 120 ohm switch setting (default) NT8D72AA, NT8D72AB NT8D72BA S1 S2 OFF ON OFF ON S1 S2 11 22 or 75 ohm switch setting 120 ohm switch setting (default) S1 S2 OFF ON OFF ON 553-7463[...]

  • Page 134

    Page 134 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card QPC71 E&M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk cards Options (minimum vinta ge N) Plug location NT5D21 Core/Network module NT8D35 Network module F13 Application Unit 0 E35 switch Un it 1 E5 switch 123456781234567 8 E&M off off off on off off o[...]

  • Page 135

    Option settings Page 135 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC414 Network card Application Pin connection J3/S2 and J4/S1 T -1 f acilities (including PRI/DTI),* channel ser vice unit connect pins 1 and 2 (pin 1 is next to the white dot) Note 1: P ossible jumper locations for vintage B (for diff erent styles/ser ies): J3—E11 or H11 [...]

  • Page 136

    Page 136 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 QPC441 3-Port Extender cards For CS 1000M SG and Multi Group systems, QPC441 vintage F or lat er must be used in all modules. Ta b l e 4 4 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT4N41CP PII Core/Net modules Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to “A”. Switch Settings Module[...]

  • Page 137

    Option settings Page 137 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 45 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT5D21 modules Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to “A”. Switch Settings Module D20 s witch po sition 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NT5D21 (Op tion 61C) Core/Network 0 of f on on off on on on on Core/Network 1 of f on on off on on on of[...]

  • Page 138

    Page 138 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Ta b l e 4 6 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT8D35 module Jumper Settings: Set J umper RN27 at E35 to “A”. Switch Settings Modules D20 s witch po sition 1 2 3 4 Option 81, 81C (Note 1) off on on on Shelf Group 5 6 7 8 0 on on on on 1 on on off on 0 2 on off on on 3 on o[...]

  • Page 139

    Option settings Page 139 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling Trunk cards Table 47 and Table 48 on page 140 list option setti ngs for loop signali ng trunk cards. T abl e 47 QPC559, QPC560 sing le density Application Single den sity—Unit 0 /1 F30/F8 switch 123456 Outgoing ANI only: loop pulsing off off of[...]

  • Page 140

    Page 140 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Ta b l e 4 8 QPC559, QPC560 double de nsity Application Double density— Unit 0/1/2/3 H17/H3/A17/A3 switch 123456 Outgoing ANI only: loop pulsing off off off off off off batter y and ground p ulsing off off off off on off Other than outgoing ANI on off on off on off Jumpers [...]

  • Page 141

    Option settings Page 141 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards Table 49 lists switch and jumper settings for options availabl e. T abl e 49 QPC528 T runk cards switch and jumper settings Switch Settings Switch position: Switch S1 (location A23) 12345678 on off on off on off on off Switch position: Unit 0, Sw[...]

  • Page 142

    Page 142 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 QPC471 Clock Controller card Table 50 lists option settings for the QPC471 Clock Controller card. Ta b l e 5 0 QPC471 vintage H System SW1 SW2 SW4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 61C on on on on off off off off off on * * 81 off off off off off off off off off on * * 81C on off off o[...]

  • Page 143

    Option settings Page 143 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Trunk card Note 1: There is no ground start signalling for QPC777 CO trunk cards. Always select loop start signalling for Q PC777 CO trunk cards. Note 2: On QPC777 CO trunk cards, the pads are in for short line lengths and the pads are out fo[...]

  • Page 144

    Page 144 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 QPC550 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card Tables 51 through 55 give the op tion settings for the QPC550 DID Trunk card. Ta b l e 5 1 QPC550 vintages A and B—real/com plex balance impedance selection Device location Device designation Switch numb er Unit numb er Impedance type Re[...]

  • Page 145

    Option settings Page 145 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 53 QPC550 vintage A—software/hard ware control for 2dB pad Device location Device designation Unit numb er Switch numb er S/W 2 dB pad contr ol H/W (pad in) (pad out) F38 S1 0 1 off off on 2 on off off 1 3 on off off 4 off off on F1 S2 0 1 off off on 2 on off off 1 [...]

  • Page 146

    Page 146 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Ta b l e 5 5 QPC550 vintage B—software control for 2dB pad Device location Device designation Unit numb er Switch numb er 2 dB pad cont rol H/W (pad in) (pad out) F38 S1.0/1 1 1 on of f 2 off off 0 3 of f off 4 on off F1 S1.2/3 3 1 on of f 2 off off 2 3 of f off 4 on off[...]

  • Page 147

    Option settings Page 147 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk card Signal duration on the 18-pair faceplate S1 (F33) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Binar y value (.1 second) 1 2 4 8 16 32 Note: This switch determines the length of time a signal stays on the 18-pa ir data bus. The time is set in binary to the nearest tenth second.[...]

  • Page 148

    Page 148 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 QPC595 Digitone Receiver cards QPC577, QPC596 Digitone Receiver daughterboards QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card Location Connection 12 DTMF tones E9 Center to E3 16 DTMF tones E9 Center to E2 16/12 tone options jumper Jum per at P1 16 tone (4 x 4) connect pins 1 and 2 12 to[...]

  • Page 149

    Option settings Page 149 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 1, 3, 7 on 136–225 m (451–750 ft) 101–200 m (356–655 ft) Switch 3 option for DTI with ESF SW3-1 on = e xtended superframe forma t (ESF) off = superframe f ormat (SF) T abl e 56 QPC720 Primary Rate Interface ca rd (P a rt 2 of 2) Switch S2 setting s T o repeater facili[...]

  • Page 150

    Page 150 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 QPC775 Clock Controller card Tables 57 and 58 give option settings for the QPC775 Clock Con troller card. Ta b l e 5 7 QPC775 (before vinta ge E) switch settings System SW2 SW3 SW4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 CS 1000M MG off off off off off off off off on on on on CS 1000M SG on [...]

  • Page 151

    Option settings Page 151 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card Tables 59 through 61 list option settin gs for the QPC841 4-Port SDI card. T abl e 59 QPC841 port 1 and 2 address selection Device number SW14 Po r t 1 Po r t 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 off off off off off on on on 2 3 off off off off off o[...]

  • Page 152

    Page 152 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Device number SW15 Po r t 3 Po r t 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 off off off off off on on on 2 3 off off off off off on on off 4 5 off off off off off on off on 6 7 off off off off off on off off 8 9 off off off off off off on on 10 11 off off off off off off on off 12 13 off off of[...]

  • Page 153

    Option settings Page 153 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 61 QPC841 DTE or DCE selection Mode Po r t 1 — S W 8 Po r t 1 — S W 9 123456123456 DTE (ter minal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (modem) NT1P61 (Fiber) off on off off off off off on off off off off on on on off on off on off on on on on Po r t 2 ?[...]

  • Page 154

    Page 154 of 894 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 155

    Page 155 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 180 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 156

    Page 156 of 894 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 used whenever the phone lines have t o leave the building in which t he switch is installed. The NT1R20 OPS analog line card provides: • line supervision • hookflash • battery reversal Each unit is independentl y configured by software contro[...]

  • Page 157

    NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 157 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 21 OPS analog line card – faceplate S OPS Anlg LC NT1R20 Rlse 0x Card lock latch Card lock latch This symbol indicates that field-selectable jumper strap settings are located on this card LED 553-6190[...]

  • Page 158

    Page 158 of 894 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Functional description This functional description of the NT 1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card is divided int o two parts. Firs t, a descri ption of the card’s control, signaling, and p ower interfaces is given , followed by a descr[...]

  • Page 159

    NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 159 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card interfaces Voice and signaling interfaces The eight line interfaces provide d by the NT1R20 OPS analog line card connect to conventional, 2-wire (ti p an d ring), analog line facilit ies. Incoming analog voice and signaling in formation from a[...]

  • Page 160

    Page 160 of 894 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Line interface units The NT1R20 OPS analog line card contains eight independen tly configurable interface units. Relays are pr ovided in each unit to apply ringing onto the line. Signal detection circuits mo nitor on-hook/off-hook sign aling. Two c[...]

  • Page 161

    NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 161 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation — firmware version — self-test status — programmed configuration statu s • receipt and implementatio n of card configuration: — programming of the codecs — enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card — programming of input/o[...]

  • Page 162

    Page 162 of 894 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 See Software Input/Output: Admi nistration (553-3001-311 ) for LD 10 service change instructions. Ta b l e 6 2 OPS analog line card configuration Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of ser vice ONS OPS Loop resistan[...]

  • Page 163

    NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 163 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Port-to-port lo ss configuration The loss plan for the NT1R20 OPS anal og line card determines port- to-port loss for connections between an OPS anal og line card unit (p ort) and othe r ports. The transmission properties of each lin e unit are cha[...]

  • Page 164

    Page 164 of 894 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Analog line interface Table 63 lists the electrical characteris tics of NT1R20 OPS analog line card line interface units. T abl e 63 OPS analog line card – el ectrical characteristics Characteristic Specification T er minal impedance (TIMP) 60 0 [...]

  • Page 165

    NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 165 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements Table 64 shows the maximum power cons umed by the card from each system power supply. Foreign and surge voltage protection The NT1R20 OPS analog line card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage (power cross) specifications and FCC P[...]

  • Page 166

    Page 166 of 894 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Environmental specifications Table 66 shows the environmental speci fications of the OPS analog line card. Operation The applications, featur es, and signaling arrangem ents for each unit on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card are assi gned through LD [...]

  • Page 167

    NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 167 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Incoming calls Incoming calls to a telephone connected to the NT1R20 OPS analog lin e card originate from stations that can be local (serve d by the PBX) or remote (served through the public switched telephone network). The alerti ng signal to tele[...]

  • Page 168

    Page 168 of 894 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Outgoing calls For outgoing calls from a telephone, a line unit is seized when the telephone goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance l oop across the tip and ring leads towards the NT1R20 OPS analo g line card (see Table 68 on page 168 ). When the [...]

  • Page 169

    NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 169 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Outpulsing Addr essing signals Near-end station dials number (loop pulsing or DTMF tones). The system detects star t of dialing and remov e dial tone . Ringback (or busy) The system decodes addressing, route calls, and supply r ingback tone to near[...]

  • Page 170

    Page 170 of 894 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Connector pin assignments The OPS analog line card brings the eight analog telephone lines to the IPE backplane through a 160-pi n connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the module, which is then co[...]

  • Page 171

    NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 171 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 23 OPS analog line card – typica l cross co nnection e xample 553-AAA1117 NT8D37 IPE Module Slot 0 NT1R20 Off-premise Station Line Card Unit 0 Unit 7 0T 0R 26 1 27 2 System Cross-connect OPS or ONS telephone connections A MDF Unit 1 Unit 2[...]

  • Page 172

    Page 172 of 894 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Configuring the OPS analog line card The line type, termin ating impedance, and balance network confi guration for each unit on the card is selected by soft ware service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card[...]

  • Page 173

    NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 173 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Before the appropriate balance networ k can be selected, the loop length between the near-end and the far-end station must be known. To assist in determining loop l ength, “Port-to-port l oss” on p age 178 describes some typical resistance and [...]

  • Page 174

    Page 174 of 894 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 24 OPS analog line card – jumper block locations 553-6191 J4.0 J4. 1 J6. 0 J6. 1 J7 .0 J7 . 1 J 0.0 J0. 1 J2. 0 J2. 1 J 3.0 J3. 1 J1 .0 J1 . 1 J5. 0 J5. 1[...]

  • Page 175

    NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 175 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation local office, or through a distant office. The line is not switched at these offices; however, depending on the facil ities used, the local office serving the OPS station can pro vide line functions such as battery and ringing. Facilities are gener[...]

  • Page 176

    Page 176 of 894 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 25 Traditional OPS application configuratio n 553-AAA1118 System Public Network Non-switched thru connections OPS analog line card port CO trunk card port OPS termination Local CO Distant CO 0–3.5 dB 4.5 dB maximum 7.0 dB total maximum OPS[...]

  • Page 177

    NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 177 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Other applications The operating range and built-in protection pro visions of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card make it suitable for applications which are variants on the traditional configuration shown in Fi gure 25 o n page 176 . Examples of such [...]

  • Page 178

    Page 178 of 894 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Port-to-port lo ss Loss is inserted between OPS analog line card po rts and other por ts in accordance with the loss plan. This plan determines the port-to-port loss for each call. When a port is configured for CLS OPS, loss is program med into the[...]

  • Page 179

    NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 179 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The overall range ach ievable on an O PS line facility is limited by t he signaling range (2300 ohms loop includin g telephone set resistance). The signaling range is unaffected by gain treatment; thus, gain treatment can be used to extend the voic[...]

  • Page 180

    Page 180 of 894 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 OPS line terminations with lou dness characteristics designed for oth er applications can also impact transm ission performan ce. For example, wireless portables loudness characteristic s are selected for connections to switching systems for wirele[...]

  • Page 181

    Page 181 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 236 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 182

    Page 182 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 mail systems, channel banks containing FXS cards, and key systems such as the Nortel Networks Norstar. The linesid e T1 card differs from trunk T1 cards in that it supports terminal equipm ent features such as hookflash, transfer, hold, and conf[...]

  • Page 183

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 183 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 26 Lineside T1 card faceplate YEL ALM RED ALM MAINT S LTI Rlse 0x NT5D11 Card lock latch Card lock latch Warning LEDs This symbol indicates that field-selectable switch settings are located on this card Card status LED 553-6478[...]

  • Page 184

    Page 184 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table 71. The STATUS LED indicates that the lineside T1 card has successfully passed its self test, and is functional. When the car d is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self[...]

  • Page 185

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 185 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: Note: The STATUS LED indicates th e enabled/disabled status of both card slots of the lineside T1 card simultaneously. To properly enable the card, both the motherboard and the daughterboard slots must be enabled . The STATUS LED will turn [...]

  • Page 186

    Page 186 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 “Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software” on page 21 3 for information on T1 link maintenance. If the card detects that tests are bein g run or that alarms have been disabled through the MMI, this LED will light and will remain lit unt[...]

  • Page 187

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 187 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The lineside T1 card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective all-digital connection bet w een T1 compatible termin al equipment (such as voice mail systems, voice respo nse units, and trading turrets) and the system. The terminal equip[...]

  • Page 188

    Page 188 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Card interfaces The lineside T1 card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops through the DS-30X Interfaces circuits and maintenance data over the card LAN link. T1 interface circuit The lineside T1 card contains one T1 li ne interface [...]

  • Page 189

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 189 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Microcontrollers The lineside T1 card contains a microcont roll er that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller cont rols the followi ng: • reporting to the CPU via th[...]

  • Page 190

    Page 190 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Man-Machin e Interface The lineside T1 card provides an opti onal Man-Machine Interface (MMI) that is primarily used for T1 link performance monitoring and problem diagnosis. The MMI provides alarm notification, T1 link performance reporting and[...]

  • Page 191

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 191 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements The lineside T1 card requires +15 V, – 15 V, and +5 V from the backplane. One NT8D06 IPE Power Supply AC or NT6D 40 IPE Power Supply DC can supply power to a maximum of eight lineside T1 cards. See Table 73. Foreign and surge[...]

  • Page 192

    Page 192 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Environmental specifications Table 74 lists th e environmental speci fications of the lineside T1 card. Installation and configuration Installation and configuratio n of the lineside T1 card consists of six basic steps: 1 Configure the dip switc[...]

  • Page 193

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 193 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Dip switch settings Begin the installation and configurat ion of the lineside T1 card by selecting the proper dip switch set tings for the environment. The lineside T1 card contains two dip switches, each containi ng eight switch pos itions. They[...]

  • Page 194

    Page 194 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 LD 97 for type: XPE. However, this is not mandatory, and, since the dip switch is li mited to 16, this will n ot always be possible. Figure 28 Lineside T1 card – T1 protocol dip switch location s 553-6479 S1 S2 dip s witches[...]

  • Page 195

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 195 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T1 framing The lineside T1 card is capable of in terfacing with CPE or CSU equipment either in D4 or ESF framing mode. Make the selection for this dip sw itch position based on what type of frami ng the CPE or CSU equipment supports. T1 coding Th[...]

  • Page 196

    Page 196 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 cabled directly into the MMI terminal or mode m; select the slave setting if this card is cabled to another lineside T1 card in a daisy chain. Tables 75 through 78 describes the proper dip switch settings for each type of T1 link. After the card[...]

  • Page 197

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 197 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 05 Off On Off On 06 Off On On Off 07 Off On On On 08 On Off Off Off 09 On Off Off On 10 On Off On Off 11 On Off On On 12 On On Off Off 13 On On Off On 14 On On On Off 15 On On On On T abl e 77 Lineside T1 card – T1 Switch 2 (S 2) dip switc h se[...]

  • Page 198

    Page 198 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Installation This section describes how to inst all and test the lineside T1 card. When installed, the line side T1 card occupies two card slots. It can be installed into an NT8D37 IPE modu le. When installing the lineside T1 card into NT8D 37 I[...]

  • Page 199

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 199 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Certain vintage levels have dedicated 25-pair I/O connect ors only for card slots 0, 4, 8, and 12. These vintage levels are cabled with only 16 pairs of wires from each card slot to the I/O panel. Some of the 25-pair I/O connectors are split betw[...]

  • Page 200

    Page 200 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Vintage levels cabl ing 16 ports For modules with vintage levels that cabled 16 ports to the I/O panel, the lineside T1 card can be installed in to the following card slot pairs: The lineside T1 card cannot be installed into the following card s[...]

  • Page 201

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 201 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Cabling the lineside T1 card After setting the dip sw itches and installing th e lineside T1 card into the selected card slots, the li neside T1 card is ready to be cabled to the CPE or CSU equipment. Connections can also be made to the MMI term [...]

  • Page 202

    Page 202 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 29 Lineside T1 card – connection us ing the NT5D13AA lineside T1 cable 553-AAA1119 NT8D37 IPE Module Slot 0 Module I/O panel 1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 5 30 6 31 7 32 8 33 9 34 16 41 17 42 24 49 System A (bl-w) (w-bl) (o-w) (w-o) (g-w) (w-g) ([...]

  • Page 203

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 203 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Proc edure 11 Connecting to the MDF To make the connections at t he MDF, follow this proced ure: 1 Punch down the first eight pa irs of a standard telco 25-pair female-connectorized cross-connect ta il starting with the first tip and ring pair of[...]

  • Page 204

    Page 204 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 13A 2 T1 Tip, T ransmit Data 13B 27 T1 Ring, T ransmit Data 14A 3 Alarm out, Nor mally open 14B 28 Alarm out, Common 15A 4 Alarm out, Nor mally closed 15B 29 No Connection 16A 5 No Connection 16B 30 A wa y from MMI terminal, Receive Data 17A 6 A[...]

  • Page 205

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 205 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 81 shows the pin assignments when usin g the NT5D13AA lineside T1 I/O cable. T abl e 81 Lineside T1 card – NT5D13AA connector pinouts (P art 1 of 2) I/O panel connector pin Lead designations NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O connector pin Lineside[...]

  • Page 206

    Page 206 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 T1 connectio ns T1 signaling for all 24 channels is transmitted over P2 conn ector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11 as shown in Table 81 on page 205 . Plug the DB15 male connector labeled “P2” into the T1 link. T1 tran smit and receive pairs must be tur[...]

  • Page 207

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 207 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation One of the ways it can report information is through this external alarm connection. If connected, th e lineside T1 card’s microproces sor activates the external alarm hardware if it detects certain T1 link problems that it has classified as al[...]

  • Page 208

    Page 208 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Proc edure 12 Connecting two or more lineside T1 cards to the MMI termi nal Follow this procedure for connecting two or more lineside T1 card s to the MMI terminal: 1 Cable the DB9 male connecto r labeled “P5” (towards MMI terminal) to one o[...]

  • Page 209

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 209 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 30 Lineside T1 card – connecting two or mo re ca rds to the MMI 553-6481 No connection LTI card no. 1 LTI card no. 2 LTI card no. 3 Last LTI card in daisy chain MMI terminal IPE module backplane I/O panel on rear of IPE module NT5D13 Mai[...]

  • Page 210

    Page 210 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Terminal configuration For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the line side T1 card, the interface characteristics must be set to the following: • Speed – 1200 or 2400 bps, de pending on the setting of switch positi on 1 of Switch[...]

  • Page 211

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 211 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation cross-referenced to the correspondin g card unit number. Th is mapping is shown in Table 82. T abl e 82 DX-30 to T1 time slot map ping (P art 1 of 2) Item TN T1 Channel Number Motherboa rd 0 1 Motherboa rd 1 2 Motherboa rd 2 3 Motherboa rd 3 4 Mo[...]

  • Page 212

    Page 212 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Disconnect superv ision The lineside T1 card supports far-end disconnect supervisio n by opening the tip side toward the terminal equi pment upon the system's detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call. The Superv[...]

  • Page 213

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 213 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software Description The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) suppl ies a maintenance interface to a terminal that prov ides T1 link di agno stics and historical i nformation. See “Installation and configuration” o[...]

  • Page 214

    Page 214 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 When the first level of severity is r eached (alarm level 1), the MMI will do the following: • activate the external alarm hardware • light the appropriate LED on the faceplate (either RED ALARM or YELLOW ALARM) • display an alarm message [...]

  • Page 215

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 215 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • framer slip seconds • loss of frame seconds It retains the T1 performance statistics for the current hour, and for each hour for the previous 24 hours. Descripti ons of each of these performance error counters, and instructions on how to re[...]

  • Page 216

    Page 216 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The MMI then prompts for a pa ssword. The passwo rd is “ LTILINK ”, and it must be typed all in capital letters. After logging in, the prompt wil l then look like this: • LTI:::> for single-card installations • LTI:ss cc> for multi[...]

  • Page 217

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 217 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Each of these commands can be execute d by typing the first letter of th e command or by typing the entire co mmand. Command sets are entered by typing the first letter of the first comma nd, a space, and the first letter of the second command or[...]

  • Page 218

    Page 218 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 D C Display Configuration Displays the configuration settings f or the cards including: • the serial number of the card • MMI fir mware v ersion • date and time • alar m enable/disable setting • self-clear ing enable/disable setting ?[...]

  • Page 219

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 219 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation S A Set Alarm parameters Alar m parameters include the allowab le bit errors per second threshold and alar m duration. S C Set Clearing Sets the alarm self-clear ing function to either enable or disable . S D Set Date Sets date or ve rifies curre[...]

  • Page 220

    Page 220 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Configuring parameters The MMI has been designed with defaul t settings so that no configuratio n is necessary. However, it can be configured to suit a specific environment. Set Time Before configuring the MMI, log in to th e system and enter th[...]

  • Page 221

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 221 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation When the Set Alarm command is used, a prompt appears to set the threshold level and duration period for alarm levels 1 and 2. The threshold value indicates the number of bit errors detected per second that is necessary to acti vate the alarm. The[...]

  • Page 222

    Page 222 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Clearing ” option has been set. Otherw ise, the alarm will continue unti l the command set Clear Alarm (C A) has been entered. When an alarm is cleared, the followin g activity caused by the alarm will be cleared: • the external alarm hardwa[...]

  • Page 223

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 223 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation When entering the Set Alarm command set, the MMI will scroll throug h the previously described series of alar m options. These opti ons are displayed along with their current value. Enter a new value or press Enter to retain the current value. Ta[...]

  • Page 224

    Page 224 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The “Disable Self-Clearing ” option cause s the system to continue the alarm condition until the Clear Alarm (C A) command set is entered. Line processing and the yellow alarm indicatio n to the CPE is terminated as soon as the alarm conditi[...]

  • Page 225

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 225 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Descriptions of the excessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions can be found in “Configuring parameters” on page 220 . Bi t errors may activate either a level 1 or level 2 alarm. The remaini ng conditions, when detected, will al[...]

  • Page 226

    Page 226 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 mode, yellow alarms can be sent and the lineside T1 card can enter line processing mode. Clear Alarm The Clear Alarm (C A) command set wi ll clear all activity initiated by an alarm: the external alarm hardware will be deactivated (the contact n[...]

  • Page 227

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 227 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation of the lineside T1 card. Entering t he Display Status (D S) command set will cause a screen similar to the followin g to appear: Performance counters and reporting The MMI monitors the performance of the T1 link acco rding to several performance [...]

  • Page 228

    Page 228 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • Loss of frame seconds – loss of frame or loss of signal for three consecutive seconds. • Framer slip seconds – one ore more frame s lips in a second. The MMI also maintains an overall error counter th at is a sum of all the errors coun[...]

  • Page 229

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 229 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Display History Enter the Display History (D H) command set to display performance counters for each hour for the past 24 hours. A screen similar to the following will appear: Use the pause command to display a fu ll screen at a time by entering [...]

  • Page 230

    Page 230 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Tests can be performed once (for 1 th roug h 98 minutes), or continuously (selected by entering 99 minutes) until a “Stop Test” command is entered. Tests continue f or the duration specif ied even if a failure occurs, and terminate at the en[...]

  • Page 231

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 231 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Test 2, external loopback, assumes an external loopback is applied to the T1 link. Test data is generated and received by the lineside T1 card on all timeslots. If t est 1 passes but test 2 fa ils, it indicates that the T1 lin k is defective betw[...]

  • Page 232

    Page 232 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 in tandem. Figure 33 demonstrates how the signaling is looped back toward the CPE equipment. Applications The lineside T1 interface is an IPE line card that provides cost-effective connection between T1-compatib le IP E and a system or off-premi[...]

  • Page 233

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 233 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation For example, the lineside T1 card can be used to conne ct the system to a T1-compatible VRU. An example of th is type of equipment is Nortel Networks Open IVR system. In this wa y, the system can send a call to the VRU. Because the lineside T1 ca[...]

  • Page 234

    Page 234 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 35 Lineside T1 inte rface in off-premi se application 553-AAA1124 T1 T1 Channel bank LTI System Public network[...]

  • Page 235

    NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 235 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Similarly, the lineside T1 can be used to provide a connection between the system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 36. In this case, channel banks would not be required if the No rstar system is equipped with a T1 interface. Note: The line[...]

  • Page 236

    Page 236 of 894 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card s 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 237

    Page 237 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 300 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 238

    Page 238 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 in the Analog (500 /2500-type) Telephone Administ ration program LD 10. The LEI also comes equippe d with a Man-Machine Interface (MMI) maintenance program, which provi des diagnostic information regarding the status of the E1 link. • NT5D33AC/[...]

  • Page 239

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 239 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation motherboard (31.75 by 25.40 cm (12.5 by 10 in) and a daught erboard (5.08 by 15.24 cm (2 by 6 in). Card connections The LEI uses the NT8D81AA Tip and Ri ng cable to connect from the IPE backplane to the 25-pair Amphenol co nnector on th e IPE In[...]

  • Page 240

    Page 240 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 37 NT5D33AB LEI card – fac eplate[...]

  • Page 241

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 241 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 38 NT5D34AB LEI card – fac eplate[...]

  • Page 242

    Page 242 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The LEDs give status indication s on the operations as described in Table 87. The STATUS LED indicates if the LEI has successfully passed its s elf test, and therefore, if it is f unctional. When the card is inst alled, this LED remains lit for t[...]

  • Page 243

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 243 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation condition. Depending on how the Man Machine Int erface (MMI) is configured, this LED will remain lit until one the fo llowing actions occur: • If the “Self-Clearing” function is en abled in the MMI, the LED will clear the alarm when the al[...]

  • Page 244

    Page 244 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 39 LEI card – block diagram[...]

  • Page 245

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 245 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Overview The LEI card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective, all-digital connection between E1 compatible termin al equi pment (such as voice mail systems, voice response units, trading turr ets, etc.) and the system. In this applic[...]

  • Page 246

    Page 246 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 E1 interface circuit The LEI contains one E1 line-interface circuit which provide s 30 individually configurable voice interfaces to one E1 link in 30 differ ent time slots. The circuit demultiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS-30X transmit signaling bi tst[...]

  • Page 247

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 247 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation — card identification (card type , vintage, serial number) — firmware version — self-test results — programmed unit parameter status • receipt and implementatio n of card configuration — control of the E1 line interface — enabling/[...]

  • Page 248

    Page 248 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 provides alarm notification, E1 link perform ance reporting, and faul t isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the I/O panel to a terminal or modem. Multiple card s (up to 64) can be served through one MMI terminal [...]

  • Page 249

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 249 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 2 Redirecting Line ID Presentation (RLIP) When an incoming call over th e TDM/ IP network or a CS 1 000 originated call which has undergone redirecti ons is directed towards the CAS+ compliant sy stem, Redirecting Li ne ID can be provided over t[...]

  • Page 250

    Page 250 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Power requirements Table 89 shows the volt age and maximu m current that the LEI requires from the backplane. One NT8D06 IPE Power Su pply AC or NT6D40 IPE Supply DC can supply power to a maximum of eight LEIs. Foreign and surge voltage protectio[...]

  • Page 251

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 251 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Installation and Configuration Installation and configuratio n of the LEI consists of six basic steps: 1 Set the dip switches on the LEI for the call environment. 2 Install the LEI into the selected card slots. 3 Cable from the I/O panel to the [...]

  • Page 252

    Page 252 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 of the motherboard circuit card as sho wn in Figure 41 on page 254 . The settings for these switches are shown in Table 91 on page 255 through Table 94 on page 258 . When the LEI card is oriented as shown in Figure 41 on page 254 , the dip switch[...]

  • Page 253

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 253 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation E1 Coding The LEI is capable of interfacing with LTU equipment usi ng either AMI or HDB3 coding. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on the type of coding the LTU equipment supports.[...]

  • Page 254

    Page 254 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 41 LEI card – E1 protocol dip switch locations U7 8 U7 7 C4 6 U6 4 U6 6 U7 9 U6 3 U6 5 U6 2 RP1 6 C4 1 C3 6 U6 1 C3 5 U6 0 U4 8 U4 9 U4 7 U2 5 U2 6 U2 9 R2 5 R2 6 C2 5 C3 4 R2 0 R1 9 C3 7 C7 1 RP8 RP7 C4 2 C6 9 C6 7 C6 8 U3 1 U3 0 U2 8 U[...]

  • Page 255

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 255 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Line supervision on E1 failure This setting determines in what state all 30 LEI ports will appear to the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 in case of E1 fail ure. Ports can appear as either in the “on-hook” o r “off-hook” states on E1 f[...]

  • Page 256

    Page 256 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 When dip switch #1, positions 2 and 8 are set to “Table,” AB Bits are configured by the user through the Set Mode MMI comm and (see “Set Mode” on page 283 ). Otherwise, the signaling scheme selected by dip switch 1, positions 2 and 8 will[...]

  • Page 257

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 257 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 93 LEI card – XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3-6) XPEC Address S1 Switch Po s i t i o n 3 S1 Switch Po s i t i o n 4 S1 Switch Po s i t i o n 5 S1 Switch Po s i t i o n 6 00 OFF OFF OFF OFF 01 ON OFF OF F OFF 02[...]

  • Page 258

    Page 258 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 When setting E1 Switch 2 dip switch se ttings, there are di fferences between vintages. For NT5D33AB or NT5D34AB cards, use Table 94. For NT5D33AC or NT5D34AC cards, use Table 94 on page 258 . Ta b l e 9 4 LEI card – E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch[...]

  • Page 259

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 259 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation After the card has been i nstalled, display the d ip switch settings using the MMI command Display Configuration (D C) . See “Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software” on page 272 for details on this and the rest of the available MMI co[...]

  • Page 260

    Page 260 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 of module or cabinet. In all other modules or cabinets where the conditions listed below do not exist, the LEI will work in any two adjacent card slots: • In the NTAK12 Small Remote IPE Expans ion Cabinet only card slots 10-15 are available. ?[...]

  • Page 261

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 261 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Vintage levels cabl ing 30 ports: For modules with vin tage levels that cabled 30 ports to the I /O panel, the LEI can be installed in any pair of card slots 0-15. Vintage levels cabl ing 16 ports: For modules with vint age levels that cable 16 [...]

  • Page 262

    Page 262 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Alternatively, all LEI conn ections can be made at the main distribution frame instead of conn ecting the NT5D35 AA or NT5D36A A LEI card extern al I/O cable at the I/O panel. This elimin ates these card slot restrictions. Cabling the LEI card Af[...]

  • Page 263

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 263 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation This cable consists of a 25-pair amph enol connector (P1) on one end which plugs into the I/O panel. The other end has 4 conn ectors: 1 a DB15 female connector (P2) with an adapter that breaks out Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive ) connectors, whic[...]

  • Page 264

    Page 264 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Table 98 shows the pin assignments from the I/O panel relating to the pin assignments of the lineside E1 I/O cable. 17A 6 A way from MMI terminal, transmit data 17B 31 T ow ard MMI terminal, transmit data 18A 7 T ow ard MMI termin al, receive dat[...]

  • Page 265

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 265 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation E1 Connections For twisted-pair install ations, E1 signaling f or all 30 channels is transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11, as shown in Table 98 on page 264 . Plug the DB 15 male connector la beled “P2” into th e E1 link. E1 tra[...]

  • Page 266

    Page 266 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 CPE at the far-end will likewise have transmit and r eceive wired straight from the RJ48 demarc at the far- end of the carri er facility. For 75 ohm coaxial installati ons, E1 signaling for all 30 channels is transmitted over P2 connect or pins 1[...]

  • Page 267

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 267 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 128 LEIs can be linked, lo cated in up to 16 separate IP E shelves, to on e MMI terminal using the daisy chain approach. If only one LEI is will be inst alled, cable from the DB9 male connector labeled “P5” (toward MMI terminal) to one of th[...]

  • Page 268

    Page 268 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 42 LEI card – connecti ng two or more cards to the MMI Terminal configuration For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the LEI, the interface characteristics must be set to: • speed – 1200 or 2400 bps • character width –[...]

  • Page 269

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 269 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • stop bits – one • software handshak e (XON/XOFF ) – off Software Configuration Although much of the arch itecture and many features of the LEI card are different from the analog line card, th e LEI has been designed to emulate an analo[...]

  • Page 270

    Page 270 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Motherboa rd 7 8 Motherboa rd 8 9 Motherboard 9 10 Motherboard 10 11 Motherboa rd 11 12 Motherboa rd 12 13 Motherboa rd 13 14 Motherboa rd 14 15 Motherboa rd 15 17 Daughterb oard 0 18 Daughterb oard 1 19 Daughterb oard 2 20 Daughterb oard 3 21 Da[...]

  • Page 271

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 271 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Disconnect superv ision The LEI supports far-end disconnect supervision by opening the tip side toward the terminal equipment upon th e system’s detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call. The Supervised Analog Line [...]

  • Page 272

    Page 272 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software Description The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) pr ovides E1-link diagnostics and historical information fo r the LEI system. See “Installation and Configuration” on page 251 for instruction s on how [...]

  • Page 273

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 273 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Two levels of alarm severity exist fo r bit errors. Different threshold and duration settings must be established for each level. When the first level of severity is r eached (alarm level 1), the MMI causes the following: • the external alarm [...]

  • Page 274

    Page 274 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • framer-slip seconds • loss-of-frame seconds The MMI retains E1 performance statis tics for the current hour, and for each hour for the previous 24. For descripti ons of these performance error counters and instructions on how to create a re[...]

  • Page 275

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 275 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation LEI::ss cc> (for multi-card inst allations, where ss re presents the shelf address and cc represents the card slot address.) Basic commands MMI commands can now be executed. The seven basic commands are: •H e l p •A l a r m • Clear •D[...]

  • Page 276

    Page 276 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Each of these commands can be execute d by entering the first lett er of the command or by entering the entire comman d. Commands with more than one word are entered by entering the first le tter of the first word, a space, and the first letter o[...]

  • Page 277

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 277 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation D S(P) Display Status . Displa ys carrier status, including alar m state and, if active , alar m lev el. (Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P . Continue scrolling by typing any other k ey .) H or ? Help . Disp lays the Help screen[...]

  • Page 278

    Page 278 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Configuring parameters The MMI has been designed with defaul t settings so that no configuratio n is necessary. However, it can be configured based on the call environment. Set Time Before beginning to configure th e MMI, login to the syst em and[...]

  • Page 279

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 279 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation — an alarm message is created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal — the LEI card enters line-conditioni ng mode — a yellow alarm message is sent to the CPE/LTU Line processing sends the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 either all “on[...]

  • Page 280

    Page 280 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The duration value is set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3,600 seconds (1 hour). This duration value indicates ho w long the alarm condition must last before an alarm will be decl ared. Low bit-error rates (10 7 t hrough 10 9 ) are restricte[...]

  • Page 281

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 281 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation An alarm condition is not automatical ly cleared until the sy stem no longer detects the respective bit error threshold during the correspond ing duration period. For example, if AL1 threshold of 6 (representin g 10-6) is specified, and a durati[...]

  • Page 282

    Page 282 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note: If the duration period set is to o long, the LEI card is slow to return to service automatically even when the carrier is no longer experiencing errors. The CLEAR ALARM (C A) command has to be entered manually to rest ore serv ice promp tly[...]

  • Page 283

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 283 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation When the far-end terminates a call, Re l ease 1 of LEI’s AB vintage send s a disconnect message to the terminal equipment and waits for the terminal equipment to go idle before going idle itself. A NO re sponse to the S S command configures Re[...]

  • Page 284

    Page 284 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 However, responding to this prompt wi th 2 selects “Table” and allows the user to set the A/B Bit Mode to what ever configurati on the user chooses. If “Table” is selected, the individual ta ble values will is prompted for. See Figure 47 [...]

  • Page 285

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 285 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Idle SEND – T his is the value that the LEI se nds (acting as the CO or PSTN) when the circuit is in the idle st ate. This value is required. Idle RECEIVE – T his is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE when it is in the idle s[...]

  • Page 286

    Page 286 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 unable to accept new calls. Set th is value to N if this stat e is not needed. If this value is not set to N, then dip switch #2 po sition 6 will determine wh ether off-hook or on-hook is sent to the M1/SL100 when this state is entered. See Table[...]

  • Page 287

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 287 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Incoming call Ringer ON SEND – Th is is the value that the LEI sends t o indicate that a call is inco ming to the CPE and that ringi ng voltage should be applied at the CPE. This value is required. Incoming call Ringer OFF SEND – This is the[...]

  • Page 288

    Page 288 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Outgoing call DIAL BREAK RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE during the break part of the digit. This value is required. Outgoing call ANSWERED SEND – This is the value that the LEI will send to indicate that [...]

  • Page 289

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 289 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 49 Display Configuration (D C) screen Alarm operation and reporting The MMI monitors the E1 link according to parameters established through the Set Alarm command for the following conditions: • Excessive bit error rate • Frame slip e[...]

  • Page 290

    Page 290 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 seconds, neither a loss of signal, out-of-frame condi tion, or blue alarm condition occurs. If a repeating device loses signal, it i mmediately begi ns sending a n unframed signal of all ones to the far-end t o in dicate an alarm condition. This [...]

  • Page 291

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 291 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 50 Display Alarm (D A) scr een The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by entering D A P . If there is more than one screen in the log, the MMI scrolls the log until the screen is full, then stops. Wh en ready to[...]

  • Page 292

    Page 292 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 51 Display Status (D S) screen Performance counters and reporting The MMI monitors the performance of the E1 link acco rding to several performance criteria including errored, bursty, unavailable, loss-of-frame and frame-slip seconds. It r[...]

  • Page 293

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 293 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • Loss-of-frame seconds are seco nds in which loss-of-frame or loss-of-signal conditions hav e exis ted for three cons ecutive seconds. • Frame slip seconds are s econds in which one or more frame sli ps occur. The MMI also maintains an over[...]

  • Page 294

    Page 294 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by entering D P P . If more than one scr een is to be display ed, the MMI scrolls unti l the screen is full, then stops. When ready to see the next screen, press any key. The displ[...]

  • Page 295

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 295 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T esting The T est Carrier (T) command allows tests to be run on the LEI, the E1 link, or the CPE device. The three tests are designed to provide the capability to isolate faulty conditions in any of these three sources. See Table 103 on page 29[...]

  • Page 296

    Page 296 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Table 103 shows which test to r un for the associated equipment. Test 1, local l oopback, loops th e E1 link signaling toward itself at the backplane connector. Test data is gene rated and received on all timeslots. If this test fails, it ind ica[...]

  • Page 297

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 297 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 57 MMI External loopback test Test 3, network loopback, loops the LEI's received E1 data back toward the CPE. No test data is generated or receiv ed by th e LEI. If test 2 passes but test 3 fails, it indicates that the CPE device is [...]

  • Page 298

    Page 298 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Applications The LEI is an IPE line card that provides cost-e ffective connection between E1-compatible IPE and a CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 system or off-premise extensions over long distances. Some examples of applica tions where an LEI[...]

  • Page 299

    NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 299 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Meridian 1 can send a call to the VRU , an d, because the LEI supports analog (500/2500-type) tel ephone functionality, the VRU is able to send the call back to the system for furth er handling. The LEI can also be used to provide off-premise ex[...]

  • Page 300

    Page 300 of 894 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 61 LEI connection to Norstar system E1 Norstar E1 LEI Public network E1[...]

  • Page 301

    Page 301 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 306 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 302

    Page 302 of 894 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The CLASS modem card circuitry is moun ted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) double-sided p rinted circuit board. The card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin edge co nnector. The faceplate of the CLASS modem card is equipped with a red [...]

  • Page 303

    NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Page 303 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Bell 202 standard. The transmission is implement ed by the appropriate PCM equivalent of 1200 or 2200 Hz. Upon completion of transmitting the CND data, the CLASS Modem card sends a message to the system software to indicate successful transmission of the CND[...]

  • Page 304

    Page 304 of 894 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 04 05 06 07 16 17 18 19 16 17 18 19 module 2, 00 01 02 03 20 21 22 23 20 21 22 23 04 05 06 07 24 25 26 27 24 25 26 27 module 3, 00 01 02 03 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 04 05 06 07 T abl e 104 Time slot mappin g (P ar t 2 of 2) XCMC mappin[...]

  • Page 305

    NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Page 305 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Electrical specifications This section lists the el ectrical characteristic of the CLASS modem card. Data transmission specifications Table 105 provide s specifications for th e 32 transm it-only modem resources. The CLASS modem card has no direct connection[...]

  • Page 306

    Page 306 of 894 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Configuration The NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches. The card derives its address fr om its position in the backplane and reports that informati on back to the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 CPU through the Card LAN [...]

  • Page 307

    Page 307 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 354 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Contents The following are the t opics in this section: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 308

    Page 308 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The NT5D97 DDP2 card hardware desi gn uses a B57 ASIC E1/T1 framer. The carrier specifications comply with the ANSI TI.403 specification. The NT5D97 provides an interface to the 2.048 Mbps external di gital line either directly or through an office repeater, N[...]

  • Page 309

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 309 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 107 indicates how the RR control signal operates with regard to the DDP2 status. NT5D97 faceplate Figure 62 on page 310 illustrates th e faceplate layout for the NT5D97 DDP card. The faceplate contains an enable /disable switch; a DDCH status LED; 6 x 2 [...]

  • Page 310

    Page 310 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 62 NT5D97 faceplate D-Channel LED ENET LED Trunk Disable LED Trunk Out of Service LED Near End Alarm LED Far End Alarm LED Loop Back LED Recovered Clock0#1 Recovered Clock0#2 Recovered Clock1#1 Recovered Clock1#2 External DCHI/MSDL Trunk0 / Trunk1 553-7[...]

  • Page 311

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 311 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 108 External connectors and LEDs Function Faceplate Designat or Ty p e Description Switch ENB/DIS Plastic , ESD pr otected Card Enab le/disable s witch Connectors Unit 0 Clock 0 RJ 11 Connector Connects reference clock 0 to Clock Controller card 0 Unit[...]

  • Page 312

    Page 312 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The following sections provide a brie f description of each element on the faceplate. Enable/Disable Swit ch This switch is used to disable the car d prior to insertion or r emoval from the network shelf. Whil e this switch is in disable position, the card wil[...]

  • Page 313

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 313 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation LBK LEDs Two yellow LEDs indicate if a remote loopback test is being performe d on trunk port 0 or trunk port 1. The loopback indication is active when the digital trunk is in remote loopback mode. N ormal call processing is i nhibited during the remote loopba[...]

  • Page 314

    Page 314 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Port definitions Since the NT5D97 card is dual-card, it equips two ports; these ports can be defined in the following combinatio ns: Note: Each loop DPNSS can be defined in Normal or Extended addressing mode. T abl e 109 NT5D97AA/AB loops configuration Loop 0 [...]

  • Page 315

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 315 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation System capacity and performance Physical capac ity Each NT5D97 DDP2 card occupies one slot on the network shelf. Each card supports two digital trunk circui ts and two network loops. The total number of DDP2 cards per system is limited by th e number of netw o[...]

  • Page 316

    Page 316 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Power requirements Table 111 lists the power requirements for the NT5D 97 DDP2 card. Cable requirements This section lists the types of cable used and the lengths required for internal and external NT5D97 DDP2 connections. Note: No additional cabling is requir[...]

  • Page 317

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 317 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation — NTCG03AB — NTCG03AC — NTCG03AD • DDP2 to DCH cables — NTCK46AA — NTCK46AB — NTCK46AC — NTCK46AD • DDP2 to MSDL cables — NTCK80AA — NTCK80AB — NTCK80AC — NTCK80AD A description of each type of DDP2 cable follows. E1 carrier cables NT[...]

  • Page 318

    Page 318 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Table 112 which follows lists the pin attribut es for the NTCK45AA cable. Figure 63 NTCK45AA Ta b l e 1 1 2 NTCK45 AA cable pins (P art 1 of 2) Cable Na me Description Color DDP2 pins I/O P anel pins 0 T- P R I 0 T X T runk 0 T ransmit Tip Black P1-1 P2-6 0 R-[...]

  • Page 319

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 319 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT8D7217 (A061 7192) The NT8D7217 (50 ft.) is an 120 Ω cable for systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the 9 pin I/ O filter connector to the 9 pin N CTE connector. Table 113 which follows lists the pin attributes for th e NT8D7217 cable. 1 G[...]

  • Page 320

    Page 320 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NTCK78AA (A0618294) The NTCK78AA (50 ft.) is an 120 Ω cable for connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin ma le) to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) (P2, P3 D-type 15 pin males). The NTCK78AA is used for systems not equipped with an I/[...]

  • Page 321

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 321 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 114 lists the pin attri butes for the NTCK78AA cable. NTCK79AA (A0618296) The NTCK79AA (40 ft) is a 75 Ω coaxial cable for connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pi n male) to the Line Terminating Unit (LTU) (P2, P3, P4, P5 BNC mal[...]

  • Page 322

    Page 322 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Table 115 lists the pin attri butes for the NTCK79AA cable. Figure 66 NTCK79AA Ta b l e 1 1 5 NTCK79 AA cable pins (P art 1 of 2) Cable Name Description Color DDP2 pins NCTE pins 0 T- P R I 0 T X T runk 0 T ransmit Tip Red P1-1 P2 inner conductor 0 R-PRI0TX T [...]

  • Page 323

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 323 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Reference cl ock cables The NTCG03AA (14 ft), NTCG03AB (2.8 ft), NTCG03AC (4.0 ft), or NTCG03AD (7 ft), is a DDP2 card to Clock Controller cable, connecting each of the CLK0 or CLK1 ports on th e DDP2 faceplate to the primary or secondary source ports on Clock[...]

  • Page 324

    Page 324 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • NTCK46AC (35 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable • NTCK46AD (50 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable External MSDL cable The NTCK80 cable connects the DDP2 card to the NT6D80 MSDL card. The cable is available in four different sizes: • NTCK80AA (6 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable ?[...]

  • Page 325

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 325 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Cable diagrams Figure 70 on page 326 and Figure 71 on page 32 7 provide examples of typical cabling configur ations for the DDP2. Figure 70 shows a typical DDP2 cabling for a system with an I/O panel, with the connection between the I/O panel and a Network Cha[...]

  • Page 326

    Page 326 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 70 DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel LED's Switch DCH Trunk 553-8489 clk0 Port 0 clk1 clk0 Port 1 clk1 NCTE (MDF or L TU) NCTE NT8D7217 cable NT8D7217 cable Clock Controllers NTCK78AA/NTCK79AA cable NTCK80 cable to MSDL or NTCK48 cable to DC[...]

  • Page 327

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 327 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 71 DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel LED's Switch DCH Trunk 553-7400 clk0 Unit 0 clk1 clk0 Unit 1 clk1 NCTE (MDF or L TU) Clock Controllers NTCK78AA/NTCK79AA cable NTCK80 cable to MSDL or NTCK48 cable to DCHI NT6D80 MSDL or NT6D11AF/NT5K7[...]

  • Page 328

    Page 328 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Functional description NT5D97 circuit card locations Each NT5D97 card requires one slot on a shelf. N T5D97 cards can be placed in any card slot in the network bus. Note in all cases - If an NT8D72BA/NTCK43 card is being replaced by a DDP2 card, the D-channel [...]

  • Page 329

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 329 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The following parameters are set by DIP switches. The boldface font shows the factory set-up. LBO Setting S5 S11 S6 S12 S7 S13 Receiver Interface S8 S14 General Pur pose S9 S15 T abl e 116 DIP switch settings for NT5D97AA/AB (P art 2 of 2) Card Tr u n k s 0 an[...]

  • Page 330

    Page 330 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 72 Dip switches fo r NT5D97AA/AB[...]

  • Page 331

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 331 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AA/AB Impedance level and unit mode The S9/S15 switch selects the impedance le vel and loop operation mode on DEI2 OR PRI2. Ref er to Table 117 . Transmission mode A per-trunk switch (S4/S1 0) provides selection of the digita[...]

  • Page 332

    Page 332 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note: Do not change this setup. Receiver impedance A per-trunk set of four DIP switch es (S 8/S14 p rovides selection between 75 or 120 ohm values. Refer to Table 120. Ring ground switches for NT5D97AA/AB A set of four Dip switches (S2) select s which Ring lin[...]

  • Page 333

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 333 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughter board for NT5D97AA/AB In case of an on-board NTBK51AA D-ch annel daughterb oard, set of four switches (S3) provide t he daughterboard address. Refer to Table 129 on page 338 . Note: Switch 8 of S3 (S3-8) does not[...]

  • Page 334

    Page 334 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 2 OFF ON OF F OFF 3 ON ON OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF ON OFF 5 ON OFF ON OFF 6 OFF ON ON OFF 7 ON ON ON OFF 8 OFF OFF OFF ON 9 ON OFF OFF ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON 11 ON ON OFF ON 12 OFF OFF ON ON 13 ON OFF ON ON 14 OFF ON ON ON 15 ON ON ON ON Note 1: The system contains a ma[...]

  • Page 335

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 335 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5D97AD DIP switch settings The the NT5D97 DDP2 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for trunk parameters settin gs for port0 and port1 respectively. Addition ally, the DDP2 card is equipped with one set of four DIP swit ches for the Ring Ground set[...]

  • Page 336

    Page 336 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 73 Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD 1 234 S2 123 4 S10 1 234 S3 123 4 S13 1 234 S4 123 4 S14 1 234 S5 123 4 S15 1 234 S6 123 4 S1 1 123 4 S7 1234 S12 1234 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 S8 1234 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 S9 123 4 S1 6 S1 NT 5D97A D P2 P1 Fac e Pla t e 1A B 60 AB [...]

  • Page 337

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 337 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Trunk interface swi tches for NT5D97AD Trunk 0 switches Switch S12 gi ves the MPU info rmation about i ts environment. Switch S2 selects the Transmission mode. Switch S3 , S4 , and S5 select LBO function. T abl e 125 General purpose switches f or NT5D97AD Swit[...]

  • Page 338

    Page 338 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Switch S6 selects the Receiver interface. Trunk 1 switches for NT5D97AD Ring ground switches for NT5D97AD Switch S16 selects which ring lines connect to ground. When set to ON, the ring line is grounded. T abl e 128 Receiver interface switches for NT5D97AD Imp[...]

  • Page 339

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 339 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughterboard for NT5D97AD Switch S9 selects the NTBK51AA DCH daughter card add ress. Switch S8 is not used when the NTBK51 AA daughter card is used. S8_1-10 can be set to OFF position. T abl e 131 NTBK51AA DCH switches f[...]

  • Page 340

    Page 340 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 MSDL external card Use Table 133 to set the card address. T abl e 132 Switch settings f or MSDL external car d Switch number Function S9_1-10 X S8_1-10 X Ta b l e 1 3 3 Switch setting f or MSDL external car d (P art 1 of 2) Switch S etting DNUM (LD 17) 1234 0 [...]

  • Page 341

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 341 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Architecture Clock operation There are two types of clock operation - tracking mode and free-run mode. Tracking mode In tracking mode, t he DDP2 loop sup pli es an external clock reference to a clock controller. Two DDP2 loops can operate in tracking mod e, wi[...]

  • Page 342

    Page 342 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Reference clock errors CS 1000 Rele ase 4.0 software check s at intervals of 1 to 15 minutes to see if a clock controller or reference-clock erro r has occurred. (The interv al of this check can be configured in LD 73). In tracking mode, at any one time, there[...]

  • Page 343

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 343 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation system switches to the back-up clock controller, without affecting which reference clock is being tracked. A reference-clock error occurs when ther e is a problem with the clock driver or with the reference clock at the far end. If the clock controller detects[...]

  • Page 344

    Page 344 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Automatic clock switching If the EREF command is selected in LD 60, tracking on the primary or secondary reference clock is automatically switched in the following manner: • If software is unable to track on the assigned primary reference clock, it switches [...]

  • Page 345

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 345 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 134 summarizes the clocki ng options. Table 135 on page 346 explai ns the options in more detail. T abl e 134 Clock Contro ller options - summar y CC Option CPU T ype Notes Option 1 Single Ref from P0 on Clk0 Ref from P1 on Clk0 Option 2 Dual Ref from P0[...]

  • Page 346

    Page 346 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 T abl e 135 Clock Controller options - descri ption Clock Option Notes Option 1 This opti on provides a single CPU system with 2 cloc k sources derived from the 2 por ts of the DDP2. Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 0. Connector Clk0 provides a[...]

  • Page 347

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 347 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Operation The following discussion describes possible scenari os when replacing a digital trunk NT8D72BA PR I2 card or QPC536E DTI2 card or NTCK43 Dual PRI card configuration with a NT5D97 DD P2 card configuration. Figure 75 Clock Contro ller – Option 1 553-[...]

  • Page 348

    Page 348 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 76 Clock Contro ller – Option 2 553-7403 Primar y Ref erence Po r t 0 DDP2 Po r t 1 Clock Controller f or CPU 0 Clock Controller f or CPU 1 Secondar y Ref 1 Secondar y Ref 2 Secondar y Ref 1 Secondar y Ref 2 J1 Sec. J2 Prim. J1 Sec. J2 Prim. Primar y [...]

  • Page 349

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 349 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 77 Clock Contro ller – Option 3 553-7404 Primar y Ref erence Po r t 0 DDP2 Po r t 1 Clock Controller f or CPU 0 Clock Controller f or CPU 1 Secondar y Ref 1 Secondar y Ref 2 Secondar y Ref 1 Secondar y Ref 2 J1 Sec. J2 Prim. J1 Sec. J2 Prim. Primar y [...]

  • Page 350

    Page 350 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Case 1 - The two ports of a QPC414 network card are connected to two digital trunks. In this case, the QPC414 and the two digital trunks are replaced by a single DDP2 card, which is plugged into the network shelf in the QPC414 slot. Case 2 - One port of the QP[...]

  • Page 351

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 351 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Case 3 - The network shelf is full, one port of a QPC414 network card is connected to a digital trunk, and the s econd is connected to a peripheral buffer. This arrangement is repeated for another QPC414. The digital trunk s are located in a shelf that provide[...]

  • Page 352

    Page 352 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 8 Run and connect the NT5D97 cables. 9 If required, install connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted cross-connect terminal. 10 If required, designate connecting bl ocks at the MDF or wall mounted cross-connect terminal. 11 If required, install a Network C[...]

  • Page 353

    NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 353 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 3 If the NT5D97 card is being complete ly removed, not replaced, remove data from memory. 4 Remove cross connections at MDF to wall-mounted cross-connect terminal. 5 Tag and disconnect cabl es from card. 6 Rearrange Clock Controller cables if required . 7 Remo[...]

  • Page 354

    Page 354 of 894 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • Port 0 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 0 of the NT5D97 DDP2 card, and Port 1 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 1 of the NT5D97. This relationship must be reflected when configuring a new DCH in LD 17 (in response t[...]

  • Page 355

    Page 355 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 356 NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 356

    Page 356 of 894 NT5K02 Fl exible Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Applications The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line car d can be used for the foll owing applications: • NT5K02AA high-voltage Message Waiting analo g line card typically used in Australia • NT5K02DA ground button, low -voltage Message Waiting, analog line card[...]

  • Page 357

    Page 357 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 366 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 MFC signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 358

    Page 358 of 894 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Signaling levels MFC signaling uses pairs of frequencies to represent digits, and is divided into two levels: • Level 1: used when a call is first established and may be used to send the dialed digits. • Level 2: used after Level 1 signaling is co mpleted and may con[...]

  • Page 359

    NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 359 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation MFC signaling involves two or more level s of forward signals and two or more levels of backward signals. Separate sets of frequencies are used for forward and backward signals: • Forward signals. Level I forward sign als are dialed address digits that identify the cal[...]

  • Page 360

    Page 360 of 894 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The exact meaning of each MFC signal nu mber (1-15) within each level can be programmed separately for each trunk route using MFC. This programming can be done by the customer and allo ws users to suit the needs of each MFC-equipped trunk route. Each MFC-equipped trunk r[...]

  • Page 361

    NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 361 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Sender and receiver mode The XMFC/MFE circuit card provides the interface between the system’s CPU and the trunk circui t which uses MFC or MFE signaling. The XMFC/MFE circuit card transmits and receives forward and backward signals simultaneously o n two channels . Ea[...]

  • Page 362

    Page 362 of 894 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 XMFC sender and receiver specifications Table 138 and Table 139 provide the operating requirement s for the NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card. These specifi cations conform to CCITT R2 recommendations: Q.441, Q .442, Q.451, Q .454, and Q.455. Ta b l e 1 3 8 XMFC sender specifications[...]

  • Page 363

    NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 363 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation XMFE sender and receiver specifications Tables 140 and Table 141 on page 364 provide the operat ing requirements for the XMFC/MFE card when it is co nfigured as an XMFE card. These requirements conform to French So cotel specifications ST/PAA/CLC/CER/ 692. T one Interrup[...]

  • Page 364

    Page 364 of 894 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Physical specifications Table 142 outlines the physical speci fications of the NT5K21 XMFC/MFE circuit card. Ta b l e 1 4 1 XMFE receiver specifications Input sensitivity: accepted: rejected: rejected: rejected: -4 dBm to -35 dBm +/- 10 Hz of nominal -42 dBm signals -4 d[...]

  • Page 365

    NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 365 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Cabinet Location Must be placed in the main cabinet (Slots 1-10) P ower requirements 1.1 Amps typical Environmental considerations Meets the environment of the system T abl e 142 Phys ical speci fications (P ar t 2 of 2)[...]

  • Page 366

    Page 366 of 894 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 367

    Page 367 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 372 NT6D70 SILC Line card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 368

    Page 368 of 894 NT6D70 SILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 B-channels transmit user voice and data information at high speeds, while D-channels are packet-switched links that carry call set- up, signaling and other user data across the network. One single DSL can carry two simultaneous voice or data conversations t o the same o[...]

  • Page 369

    NT6D70 SILC Line card Page 369 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation A logical terminal is any terminal that can communi cate with the s ystem over a DSL. It can be directly connected to the DSL through its own physical termination or be indirectly connected th rough a common physical termination. The length of a DSL depends on the speci[...]

  • Page 370

    Page 370 of 894 NT6D70 SILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU. The serial control interface is an IPE bus used by the MPU to communicate with the S/T transceivers. IPE interface logic The IPE interface logic co nsists of a Card-LAN interfa ce, an IPE bus interface, a maintenance si g[...]

  • Page 371

    NT6D70 SILC Line card Page 371 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The transceiver circuits provide four-wir e full-duplex S/T bus interface. This bus supports multiple physical terminat ions on one DSL where each physical termination suppo rts multiple logical B-channel and D-channel ISDN BRI terminals. Idle circui t-switched B-ch ann[...]

  • Page 372

    Page 372 of 894 NT6D70 SILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 373

    Page 373 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 376 NT6D71 UILC Line card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 374

    Page 374 of 894 NT6D71 UILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Power consumption Power consumptio n is +5 V at 1900 mA. Functional description Each U interface provides two B-channels and one D-channel and supports one physical termi nation. This terminat ion can be to a Net work Termination (NT1) or directly to a single U interfac[...]

  • Page 375

    NT6D71 UILC Line card Page 375 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The serial control interface is an IP E bus that communicates with the U transceivers. IPE interface logic The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, a IPE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel inte rface, a digital pad, and a clock converter. Th[...]

  • Page 376

    Page 376 of 894 NT6D71 UILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 377

    Page 377 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 414 NT6D80 MSDL card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 378

    Page 378 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 that support the same functions. For ex ample, three cards supported with the MSDL (NT6D80) are QPC757 (D CHI) , QPC513 (ESDI), QPC841 (SDI) and NTSD12 (DDP). Though the MSDL is designed to coexist with other cards, the number of ports supported by a system eq uipped with MS[...]

  • Page 379

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 379 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 79 MSDL component layout 553-5431 S9 S10 Ones Tens Port 0 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Monitor Port LED S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Card Address Switches DCE DCE DCE DCE DTE DTE DTE DTE 422 232 422 232 422 232 422 232[...]

  • Page 380

    Page 380 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Functional description Figure 80 on page 381 illustrate s the MSDL functional block diagr am. The MSDL card is divided into fo ur major functi onal blocks: • CPU bus interface • Micro Processing Unit (MPU) •M e m o r y • Serial interface Two processing units serve as[...]

  • Page 381

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 381 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 80 MSDL block diagram Address Buffer and Decoding Logic Control and Data Transceivers Interface Registers Micro Processing Unit (68020 MPU) MPU Address Decoding Logic Shared Resource Arbitrator Memory Address Counter & Buffer Shared Memory Integrated Serial Commu[...]

  • Page 382

    Page 382 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Micro Processing Unit (MPU) The MPU, which i s based on a Motoro la 68020 processor, coordinates and controls data transfer and port addressing, communicati ng via the CPU bus with the system. Prioritized int errupts tell the MPU w hich tasks to perform. Memory The MSDL card[...]

  • Page 383

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 383 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Equipment em ulation mo de – Configure an MSDL port to emulate DCE or DTE by setting switches on the car d and downloading LD 17 interface parameters. I/O port electrical interface – Each MSDL port can be configured as an RS-232 or RS-422 interf ace by sett ing the swit[...]

  • Page 384

    Page 384 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 81 MSDL functional block diagram AML Loadware CPU Bus Boot Code & Loader Modules MSDL Handler System Interface Module Physical Layer (Layer 1) Handler P S O S + Meridian Mail PRI Trunk PRI Trunk System software MSDL software modules Application Module Link D-Chann[...]

  • Page 385

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 385 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Data flow The MSDL transmit interface, managed by the MSDL handler, sends data from the system to the MSDL. This in terface receives packetized data from the system and stores it in the tran smit buffer on th e MSDL. The tr ansmit buffer transports these messages to th e ap[...]

  • Page 386

    Page 386 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Card mix A system that exclusively uses MSDL cards can support up to 16 such cards, providing 64 ports. These p orts can be used to run various synchronous and asynchronous operations simultaneou sly. The system will also support a mix of interface cards (MSDL, DCHI, and ESD[...]

  • Page 387

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 387 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 143 lists the synchronous inte rface specifications and the means of configuring the interface parameters. Asynchronous transmissio n uses an intern al clock to generate the appropriate baud rate for s erial controllers . Table 144 lists asynchronous in terface specif[...]

  • Page 388

    Page 388 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Emulation mode Each port can be configured to emulate a DCE port or a DTE port by setting the appropriate switches on the MSD L. For details on how to set the sw itches, refer to “Installation” on page 39 2 of this document. DCE is a master or controlling device t hat is[...]

  • Page 389

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 389 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 146 on page 390 lists RS-422 interface speci fications for EIA circuits. It shows the connector pin number, th e associated signal name, and the 3 Receiv e Data (RX) BB 104 X 4 Request to Send (R TS) CA 105 X 5 Clear to Send (CTS) CB 106 X 6 Data Set Ready (DSR) CC 10[...]

  • Page 390

    Page 390 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 supported circuit type. It al so indicates wh ether the signal orig inates at the DTE or DCE device. Implementation guidelines The following are guidelines for en gineering and managing MSDL cards: • An MSDL can be installed i n any empty net work card slot. T abl e 146 RS[...]

  • Page 391

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 391 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • A maximum of eight MSDL cards can be installed in a fully occupied module becau se of the module’s power supply limitati ons. • The Clock Controller card should not be installe d in a module if more than 10 MSDL ports are configured as active RS-232 (rather than RS-[...]

  • Page 392

    Page 392 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The internal power supply in each m odule provides DC power for the MSDL and other car ds. Power co nsumptio n and heat di ssipation fo r the MSD L is listed in Table 148. Installation Device number Before installing MSDL card s, determin e which of the devices in the system[...]

  • Page 393

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 393 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation settings shown in this figure are an exam ple of the different types of interfaces available. Your system settings may differ. T abl e 149 MSDL interface switc h settings DCE swi tch DTE switc h Interface Comment OFF OFF RS-232 DTE/DCE is software configured OFF ON RS-422 D[...]

  • Page 394

    Page 394 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 82 MSDL switch setting example S9 S10 Ones Tens Port 0 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Monitor Port LED S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Care Locking Device Card Address Select Switches I/O Port Interface Configuration DIP Switches Setting for an RS-232 interface [...]

  • Page 395

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 395 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Installing the MSDL card Proc edure 16 Installing the MSDL card To install an MSDL card follow these ste ps: 1 Set Device Numb er S10 and S9. 2 Hold the MSDL by its ca rd-locking devices. Squee ze the tabs to unlatch the card locking devices and lift the locking device out [...]

  • Page 396

    Page 396 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Cable requirements The MSDL card includes four high- density 26-pin (SCSI II) female connectors for ports and one 8-pin miniature DIN connector for the monitor port. See Figure 83 on page 397 for a diagram of the MSDL cabling configuration. A D-Channel on the MSDL requires a[...]

  • Page 397

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 397 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 83 MSDL cabling I/O panel I/O panel Q P C 7 2 0 M S D L ESDI to I/O cable (NTND27AB—6 ft.) RS-232 shielded (QCAD328— 35 ft. max.) NTND27 ISL APL applications (RS-232 cable) SDI to terminal cable PRI to I/O panel cable (NTND98AA) NTND25AA—6 ft. NTND26AB—18 ft.[...]

  • Page 398

    Page 398 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note: The choices of cable to use with an MSDL card depend on what type of modem is connected. For ex ample, the NTND27 cable is used when the modem has a DB25 connection. If the modem is v.35, a customized or external ve ndor cable is required. Cable installation When the M[...]

  • Page 399

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 399 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 5 Plug the DB15 male conne ctor end of the cab le into the J5 DB15 female connector on the PRI card. 6 Secure the connections in place with their fasten ers. 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each connectio n. End of Procedure I/O panel connections Operations aside from PRI re[...]

  • Page 400

    Page 400 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 MSDL planning form Use the following planning fo rm to help sort and store information concerning the MSDL cards in your syst em as shown in the sample. Record switch settings for unequipped po rts as well as for equipped ports. MSDL data form Device no. Shelf Slot Card ID B[...]

  • Page 401

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 401 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Maintenance Routine maintenance consists of en abling and disabl ing MSDL cards and downloading new versions of peripheral soft ware. These activities are performe d by an authori zed person such as a system administrator. Troubleshooting the MSDL consists of determ ining p[...]

  • Page 402

    Page 402 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 A newly configured MSDL automatically enters the manually disabled state. An operating MSDL can be manually disabled by issuing the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 (step 1 in Figure 84). Entering the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 moves the card to manually disabled status and stop[...]

  • Page 403

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 403 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation System disab led When the system disables the MSDL card (step 4 in Figure 84 on page 402 ), it continues to communicate and attempt maintenance procedures on the card. To stop all system communication with the card, enter DIS MSDL x to disab le it (step 5 in Figure 84 on pa[...]

  • Page 404

    Page 404 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • Recovery Threshold The MSDL card was successfully enabled by the MSDL autorecovery fun ction five times w ithin 30 minutes. Each time it was system disabled because of a pr oblem encountered during operation. • Bootloading The MSDL base software is in the process of be[...]

  • Page 405

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 405 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Manually controlled maintenance Use manual maintenance comm ands found in the following programs to enable, disable, reset, get the status of, and perform self-tests on the MSDL card: • Input/Output Diagnost ic Program LD 37 •P r o g r a m L D 4 2 • Link Diagnostic Pr[...]

  • Page 406

    Page 406 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Disabling the MSDL To disable an MSDL card, enter DIS MSDL x . To disable the MSDL and all its ports, enter DIS MSDL x ALL . Resetting the MSDL To reset an MSDL and initiate a limited self-test, the MSDL must be in a manually disabled state. To perform th e reset, enter RST [...]

  • Page 407

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 407 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Manually isolating and correcting faults Problems are due to configuration erro rs that occur during installation or hardware faults resulting from component failure during operation. See “Symptoms and actions” on page 410 for more information on problem symptoms and re[...]

  • Page 408

    Page 408 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Previously operating MSDL cards Problems that occu r during no rmal operation usually resu lt from f aulty cards. Follow these steps to evaluate the situation: 1 Use the STAT MSDL x command to check MS DL card status. See “Displaying MSDL status” on page 406 . 2 If the c[...]

  • Page 409

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 409 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Replacing MSDL cards After completing MSDL troubleshooting you may determine that one or more MSDL cards are defective. Remove the defective cards and replace the m with new ones. Proc edure 19 Replacing an MSDL car d An MSDL card can be removed from and inserted into a sys[...]

  • Page 410

    Page 410 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Symptoms and actions Explained here are some of the sympt oms, diagnoses, and actions required to resolve MSDL card problems. Contact y our Nortel Networks representative for further assistance. These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the card t[...]

  • Page 411

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 411 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation System disabled actions These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the card to an enabled state foll owing system disabling. SYSTEM DI SABLED—NOT RESPONDING Cause: The MSDL card is not installed or is unable to respond to the messages from the s[...]

  • Page 412

    Page 412 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 using autorecovery. If a diagn ostic program (overlay ) is active, the downloadin g of the MSDL bas e code occur s later. Action : Wait to see if the system will enab le the card immediately. If the MSDL is enabled, no further action is necessary. If the MSDL base code downl[...]

  • Page 413

    NT6D80 MSDL card Page 413 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation SYSTEM DI SABLED—OVERLOA D Cause: The system received an excessive number of messages from the MSDL card in a certain time . If th e card in vokes overload four times in 30 minutes, it exceeds the recovery th reshold as described in “SYSTEM DISABLED—RECOVERY THRESHOLD[...]

  • Page 414

    Page 414 of 894 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 SYSTEM DISAB LED—FATAL ERRO R Cause: The MSDL card encountered a fatal error and cannot recov er. The exact reason for the fatal erro r is shown in the MSDL300 error message output to the console of TTY when the error occurred. Action: Check the MSDL300 message to find out[...]

  • Page 415

    Page 415 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 514 NT7D16 Data Access card Content list The following are the t opics in this section: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 416

    Page 416 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Introduction The NT7D16 Data Access card (DAC) is a data interface card that integrates the functionality of the QPC723A RS-232 4-Port Interface Line card (RILC) and the QPC430 Asynchr onous Interface Line card (AILC). This combination allows the NT7D16 DAC to work wi[...]

  • Page 417

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 417 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • Wire test mode • Self diagnostics • Inbound modem pooling wit h any asynchronous modems • Outbound modem pooli ng using “dumb” modems • Outbound modem pooli ng using auto dialing mod ems Controls and indicators The LEDs on the DAC faceplate indicat e t[...]

  • Page 418

    Page 418 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Port mode This lamp lights to indicate that the port indicated is in RS-42 2 mode. If the lamp is dark, the specified port is in RS-232-C mode. Port number The number displayed specifies the port drivi ng the EIA signal LEDs mentioned above. The push-button swi tch be[...]

  • Page 419

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 419 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 85 NT7D16 Data Access card faceplate SD RD DTR DSR DCD RI CONNECT RS-422 2 UN SEL WIRE TEST UN0 UN1 UN2 UN3 UN4 UN5 NT7D16AA card status EIA signal monitor LEDs CONNECT P ort mode P ort number P ort select Wire test 553-5018 ON OFF[...]

  • Page 420

    Page 420 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Call Set-up abort The user may abandon the call during th e dialogue phase using one of the following me thods: • Terminal off-line This method is useful fo r RS-232-C interface only. The equipment dr ops Data Terminal Ready (DTR) to indicate an idle connection. For[...]

  • Page 421

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 421 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: If this feature is active, and th e port is connected to a DTE that holds DTR OFF w hen idle, th e port will be permanently b usied out to inbound calls following th e DTR timeout period. Inactivity timeout Once a successful data call is completed, the user&apos[...]

  • Page 422

    Page 422 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 CTS Clear T o Send 5 3 — DSR Data Set Ready 6 4 — DCD Carrier De tect 8 5 — DTR Data T er mina l Ready 20 6 — RI Ring Indicator 22 7 — T abl e 151 Wire test signal lea ds cy cle counts Label EIA Signal Lead description Pin Cyc le count RS-232-C RS-422 Note: [...]

  • Page 423

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 423 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Independent storage of dialing parameters Two dialing parameters, DCD control, and Answer mod e, can be modified by both keyboard and Hayes dialing commands. The Hayes dialing mode also allows the user to modify the Input echo cont rol, and Prompt/Result codes transmi[...]

  • Page 424

    Page 424 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The fourth mode, gateway, is a subset of the modem mode and is not normally used. This mode is useful if the attach ed modems do not have Ring Indicator lead. The application used is inbound mo dem pooling. The different modes enable the DAC to connect to different ty[...]

  • Page 425

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 425 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 2 (DTE) OFF “Host On” (RI) ON Fo r c e d OFF Not Hotline Modem P o ol inbound and outbound (for Hay es 1200 modem) MSB by RI 3 (DTE) OFF “Host On” (RI) ON Fo r c e d ON Hotline Modem P o ol inbound only (Hotline for Ha y es 1200 modem only) 4 (DTE) ON “K e y[...]

  • Page 426

    Page 426 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 6 (DTE) ON “KBD On” (No RI) ON Fo r c e d OFF Not Hotline Gatewa y inb ound and outboun d (DTR is on in idle state) MSB by DCD 7 (DTE) ON “KBD On” (No RI) ON Fo r c e d ON Hotline Gatewa y inb ound only (Hotline by DCD: ON f or Hotline OFF f or VLL) (DTR is ON[...]

  • Page 427

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 427 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 10 (DCE) OF F “Host On” (prompts off) ON Fo r c e d OFF Not Hotline Host similar to MCDS but does not require DTR to be ON Modes 8, 9, 10, and 11 are for RS232 Host connectivity 11 (DCE) OF F “Host On” (prompts off) ON Fo r c e d On Hotline Continuous Hotline [...]

  • Page 428

    Page 428 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Selecting the proper m ode for Modem connectivity Select modes 0, 1, 2, and 3 when the DAC is connected to different types of modems for inbound and outbound modem p ooling. In these modes, the DA C operates as a DTE, monitors the DSR, DC D, and RI control leads, and [...]

  • Page 429

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 429 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation In the case of outbo und modem pooling , the DAC answers the data call and drives the DTR lead ON (modes 0 and 1). Then the calling data module and the DAC form a transparent link betw een the calling DTE and the modem. The DTE user may then enter the appr opriate com[...]

  • Page 430

    Page 430 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Mode 0 This mode should be selected when th e D AC is connected to a modem, except Hayes-1200, for inbound and outbou nd modem pooling (see modes 2 and 3 for Hayes-1200 modem). The modem used shou ld have the following features: Auto-answer capability This feature is [...]

  • Page 431

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 431 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Auto-dial cap ability This feature is required when the modem is used for outbound modem pooli ng. It allows the modem to go off-hook and dial the remote number (such as Smartmod em Hayes-2400 or Bizcomp). Auto-reset capability This feature is required when the modem [...]

  • Page 432

    Page 432 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Programing DAC for mode 0 i n service change LD11 When used for inbou nd or outbound Modem Pool only, the DAC can be configured as R232 in LD11. When used for both inbo und and outbound Modem Pool, the DAC must be configured as R232; station hunti ng for the outbound [...]

  • Page 433

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 433 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 87 DAC to Modem Pool connectivity System Outbound hunting Inbound hunting DAC R232 por t 0 500/2500 line card Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 Modem 1 Modem 2 Modem 3 Modem 4 553-AAA1126 R232 por t 1 R232 por t 2 R232 por t 3[...]

  • Page 434

    Page 434 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Mode 1 This mode should be selected when th e DAC is connected to an auto-answer modem for inbound Hot line operation. In this mod e, the DAC automati cally executes Hotline operation when RI is driven ON by the modem . The modem used should have the following feature[...]

  • Page 435

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 435 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Programing DAC for mode 1 in ser vice change LD11 The DAC must be configured as R232 (t he Autodial feature key is used for this mode). The DAC must not be configured as an Asynchronous Data Module (ADM) trunk . Mode 2 This mode should be selected when the DA C is con[...]

  • Page 436

    Page 436 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note: If Call Detail Recording (CDR) is required, use separate out bound and inbound Modem Pools. Mode 3 This mode should be selected when the DA C is connected to a Hayes-1200 modem for inbound Hotlin e operation. It is recommended that mo de 1 be used for inbound Ho[...]

  • Page 437

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 437 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • The equipment can monitor the DTR lead (optional, depend ing on the mode selected). In modes 4, 5, 6, and 7, the DAC: • operates as a DTE • monitors the DSR • monitors DCD control leads • drives the DTR lead The RI lead is ignored. No menus or prompts are [...]

  • Page 438

    Page 438 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Mode 4 This mode should be selected when th e DAC is connected to a gateway for inbound and outboun d operation. The characteristics of the gateways to be used with this mode are: Auto-answer capa bility This feature is required when the gateway is used for inbound op[...]

  • Page 439

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 439 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation In the outbound operation, the DAC dr ives the DTR le ad OFF until ano ther DM calls it for outbound accessing. The DAC answers the data call and drives the DTR lead ON. The calling DM is then transparently connected to the gateway. The DAC requires the gateway to dri[...]

  • Page 440

    Page 440 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Mode 5 This mode should be selected when th e DAC is connected to an auto-answer gateway for inbound Hotline operat ion. In this mode, the D AC automatically executes Hotline operation when DCD is driven ON by the gateway. If the DM being called by the Ho tline operat[...]

  • Page 441

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 441 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Programing DAC for mode 6 in ser vice change LD 11 When used for inbound or outbound gateway access, the DAC can be configured as R232 in LD 11. When used for both inbound and outbound gateway access, the DAC must be configured as R232. When the DAC is programmed as s[...]

  • Page 442

    Page 442 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 go ON for 2 seconds and then OFF for 4 seconds until the call is answered by the host. When the host turns DTR ON, the DAC answers the call. If DM-to-DM protocol exchange is successful, the DAC drives CTS, DSR, and DCD ON. If DTR was already ON, the DAC does not drive[...]

  • Page 443

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 443 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Dynamic control of DTR This feature is required only if the host must be capable of releasing an established call. The host shou ld be able to drop an established data call by driving DTR OFF for more than 100 ms . Note: If the PBDO parameter in LD 11 is ON, then Make[...]

  • Page 444

    Page 444 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Programing DAC for mode 9 i n service change LD 11 The DAC must be configured as R232 or R422 (the Autodial feature is used for this mode). The DAC must not be configured as an ADM trunk. Mode 10 This mode should be selected when the DA C is connected to a host for in[...]

  • Page 445

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 445 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation This mode should be selected when the DA C is connected to a host and continuous Hotline operati on is required. In this mode, th e DAC repeatedly tries to Hotline to the Autodial DN as long as DTR is ON. When the DAC tries to Hotline to a busy Data Mo dul e, it activ[...]

  • Page 446

    Page 446 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 unless the DTR lead is driven ON by the termin al. Any terminal that drives the DTR lead ON can be used with this mode (such as VT100 or VT102). The DAC drives CTS, DSR, and DCD ON, except when a call is dropped or when control—Z is en tered during th e idle state. [...]

  • Page 447

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 447 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Mode 13 This mode should be selected when the DA C is connected to a terminal (DTE) and Hotline call origi nation is required. This mode is simila r to the operation of the ASIM when set to not-forced-DTR and Hotline. In this mode, the terminal is able to Hotline to a[...]

  • Page 448

    Page 448 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Mode 15 This mode provides a “virtual leased line” and the meaning of the “Forced DTR” switch is re-defined. This mode should be selected when the DA C is connected to a terminal (DTE) and continuou s Hotline call origin a tion is required. In this mode, the D[...]

  • Page 449

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 449 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: If AUTB is set to ON, the BAUD parameter is not prom pted. If AUTB is set to OFF, you may select a fixed baud rate in response to the prompt BAUD. When the DAC receives a call, it adapts to the caller’s baud rate. See Table 153 for connect and disconnect proto[...]

  • Page 450

    Page 450 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Outbound modem pooling: Local DM user calls to the outbound modem access number . D A C ans wers the outbound call and drives DTR ON. Modem receives DTR and prepares to receive commands. Local DM user enters the proper commands for calling the remote modem. Remote mod[...]

  • Page 451

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 451 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Mode 1 Inbound Hotline modem pools Inbound Ho tline modem pooling: Most dumb modems can be used for this application. Modem sends ri ng/no ring cycle (2 seconds ON, 4 seconds OFF) to initiate connection. D A C responds by trying to establish a Hotline call to a specif[...]

  • Page 452

    Page 452 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Mode 3 Inbound Hotline modem pools (with forced DTR) Use this mode with Hay es 1200 modem. Inbound Hotline mo dem pooling: The D A C operation is identical to mode 1 except that DTR is alwa ys f orced ON (e xcept during disconnect). Call disconnection: Disconnection i[...]

  • Page 453

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 453 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Call disconnection (D AC): D A C drops DTR if the local DM user drops the call. The Gatew a y must drop DCD . D A C drops DTR if the D A C receiv es a long break or three shor t breaks. The Gatewa y must drop DCD . Call disconnection (Gate way): Gatewa y drop s DCD (D[...]

  • Page 454

    Page 454 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Mode 6 Inbound and Outbound Gatew a y access (with f orced DTR) Inbound and Ou tbound Gate way pr otocol: The D A C operation is identical to mode 4 except that DTR is alwa ys f orced ON (e xcept during disconnect). The establis hment of the outbound call does not re [...]

  • Page 455

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 455 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Mode 8 Host access f or call origina tion and answering Host answering an in coming data call : Local DM user dials the access number to initiate the connection. D A C responds by driving RI ON for 2 seconds and OFF f or 4 seconds until the Host ans wers b y turning D[...]

  • Page 456

    Page 456 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Call disconnect ion (D A C): D A C drops DSR, DCD , and CTS if the local DM user releases the call. The Host should then drop the call. D A C drops DSR, DCD , an d CTS if the Ho st sends a long break or three shor t breaks. The Host should then drop the call. Call dis[...]

  • Page 457

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 457 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Mode 10 Host access f or call origina tion and answering (with f orced DTR) Host access for call origination and answering: The D A C operation is identical to mode 8 except DTR is alwa ys considered ON, ev en when the Host is driving DTR OFF . Call disconnection: D A[...]

  • Page 458

    Page 458 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Mode 12 T erminal access for call origina tion and answering T erminal answering an incoming data call: D A C drives DSR, DCD , and CTS ON in the idle state. Local DM user dials the access number to initiate the connection. D A C responds by driving RI ON for 2 second[...]

  • Page 459

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 459 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Call disconnection (terminal): T er minal toggles DTR fro m ON to OFF (DTR must be OFF f or 100 ms or more). The D A C turns DSR, DCD , and CTS OFF for 0.2 second and then ON. T er minal sends a long break or three shor t breaks. The D AC tur ns DSR, DCD , and CTS OFF[...]

  • Page 460

    Page 460 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Keyboard dialing Keyboard dialing is an interactive dialogue mode between the connected equipment and the DAC. This dialogue allows equi pment to give dialing commands to the DAC in order to make a data call to another far-end data port. Keyboard dialing su pports a m[...]

  • Page 461

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 461 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • Autoparity to ensure that the keyboard dialing menu is readable on the data terminal during the interactive dialogue mode • Originating calls to local and remote hosts • Ring Again • Speed Call • Two answer modes for incoming calls: m anual and auto • Di[...]

  • Page 462

    Page 462 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Prompts Call processing prompts are in up per case letters only. Other prompts co nsist of both upper and lower case characters , and the dialogu e session depicts the actual upper/lower case letters used. All prompts are preceded by the Carr iage Return and Line Feed[...]

  • Page 463

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 463 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Keyboard Autobaud is allowed after th e call is placed in off-line mode. Note: If the Hayes autobaud characters A or a are sent, the DA C will enter Hayes dialing mode. Autobaud char acter detection is selected in the software. Auto parity The user can override the do[...]

  • Page 464

    Page 464 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Whenever a Primary command is expected, the user may enter the Parity command (period). If Auto Parity has already been do ne, the Invalid Command menu is presented: The user's port may be set to idle by entering CTRL Z. Any call in progress will be dropped, and [...]

  • Page 465

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 465 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Autodial (A) The Autodial command allows the user to dial a predefined number stored within the local system. Th e DAC will automati cally attempt to pl ace a data call to the Auto dial number: The currently stored Autodi al number may be viewed by entering the primar[...]

  • Page 466

    Page 466 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 if the access code is less than the maxi mum number of digits allowed for the Speed Call list for the associated data DN (DDN). Note: If the Speed Call feature key is not defined in the software, you will be notified by the following : Feature key Speed Call not defin[...]

  • Page 467

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 467 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation By entering S on the keyboard, you enter the Speed Call Modify m enu. The Speed Call number can also be cha nge d in the so ftware. Respond to the following prompt s to change the Speed Call nu mber. By entering R on the keyboard, you enter the Rem ote Loopback Modify[...]

  • Page 468

    Page 468 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 of rings. Respond to the following prom pts to enable or disab le the Manual Answer feature. By entering D on the keyboard, you enter th e DCD Modify menu. Respond to the following prompts to enable DCD as Forced or Dynamic. M <CR> Current Answ er Mode: Manual A[...]

  • Page 469

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 469 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation By entering L on the keyboard, you enter the Long Break Detect Modify menu. Respond to th e following prompts to enable or disable th e detection of the Long Break as an abandon signal. To exit the Modify menu, enter Q. This entry retur ns you to the Primary commands [...]

  • Page 470

    Page 470 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note: If you hang up the call, or give an abandon command , Ring Again is canceled. If a Ring Again request has already b een placed, the DAC offers the option of overriding the previous request. When the called DN becomes available, the system notifies the DAC, which[...]

  • Page 471

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 471 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Again prompt within a softw are determined time period, Ring Again is canceled, and the Primary Commands Menu appears. Note 1: If th e Ring Again no tice occurs during a parameter change, the prompt only appears after the change has been completed. Note 2: If the noti[...]

  • Page 472

    Page 472 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Not in service When the DAC attempts a call to a DN th at is not supported, it sends yo u a message. The call is released, and you must reenter the Au tobaud character <CR> to initiate keyboard dialing again. No response from the system Likewise, when the DAC re[...]

  • Page 473

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 473 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Hayes dialing Like keyboard dialin g, Hayes dialing is an interactive di aling mode with the terminating equipment connected to th e NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC). In addition to the common parameters an d functions, the Hayes d ialing mode offers the following featur[...]

  • Page 474

    Page 474 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 — the DTE mode, and RI has cycled the appr opriate number of times and DCD is asserted on by the modem Note: In Gateway mode, DCD must be asserted on . In modem mode, only RI must be on. The DAC asserts DTR to the modem, and awaits DCD from the modem. Input requirem[...]

  • Page 475

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 475 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Result codes and messages Each input record generates a re sult code which is sent to the u ser. Only one code is sent regardless of the number of commands in the record. The reply is in one of two formats: • Numeric replies contain a one- or t wo-number co de • V[...]

  • Page 476

    Page 476 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Baud rate detection Every command line begi ns with Baud rate detect ion. This phase allo ws the DAC to determine the user equipment baud rate. During this phase, the DAC accepts only the ASCII “A,” or “a” characters. Once a valid autobaud character is detecte[...]

  • Page 477

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 477 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: The parity determined here over ri des the parity downloaded from the system. Also, the T (t) must be entered in the same case as the A (a). If you entered uppercase A for th e Baud Rate, you must enter upper case T for the parity. Dialing operation Like keyboar[...]

  • Page 478

    Page 478 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 For the purposes of this docu ment, when illustrat ing the prompt/response sequences, the bold type is what the user enters on the keybo ard. All other type represents the DAC output. Li kewise, “xxx xxxx,” “yyyyyyy,” or “zzzzzzz” represents numbers entere[...]

  • Page 479

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 479 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation All S registers may be changed with the exception of S1, the Ring count . If an attempt is made to change this parameter, the command is accepted but no action is taken. The Ring count is the number of 6-second intervals that have expired since an inbound call has bee[...]

  • Page 480

    Page 480 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 You can view any of the S registers by issuing the following display command. Any S register can be specified through the ATS command, and the system will displ ay the current sett ing for that parameter . More than one S register can be v iewed by listing the desired[...]

  • Page 481

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 481 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Reset Hayes parameters All of the Hayes dialing parameters and S registers remain even after the data call is complete. Similarly, if the dialing mode, keyb oard to Hayes or vice versa, are changed, the parameters remain as specified. The following command allows you [...]

  • Page 482

    Page 482 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 V 1 Result codes sent in V erbose fo r mat X 1 Features selection 0 - 8, 10 - 13 P — Dial method (pulse) S0 0 *?1 Manual Answ er (if 0)?Auto answ er on 1 ring S1 0 Ring co unt 0 S2 43 Escape sequence character Plus sign (+) S3 13 T er minator character Carr iage Ret[...]

  • Page 483

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 483 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Outbound calls The DAC supports two types of outbound data calls: • point-to-point data calls • calls sent through a modem without call ori gination capabilities Hayes dialing does no t provide for any al terations durin g call processing, Ring Again, or Controlle[...]

  • Page 484

    Page 484 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Issuing the On Hook command while the call is st ill ringing disconnects th e incoming call. The DAC disconnects the call and no tifies you with a NO CARRIER message. When the S0 register is set to 0, the DAC is set to manual answer, and an inbound call mu st be an sw[...]

  • Page 485

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 485 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation In the following example, <GT> is the Guard Time and <EC> the Escape Character defined in the S2 register. The example shows the Off Line escape sequence, the command to display an S register (Ring Count, in this case), and the command to go back on line a[...]

  • Page 486

    Page 486 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 System parameters System parameters downloaded by the switch include the type of system, the inactivity timer, and the data DN. These parameters are described below: • System type: CS 1 000S, CS 1000M, and M eridian 1 • Inactivity timeout — No timeout — 15 min[...]

  • Page 487

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 487 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation — Hotline (call the Au todial number upon connection) • Wire test — Disabled (can be invoked only with front panel switch) — Enabled (start only if the DAC f irmware is id le) • Language — English — Quebec French • Keyboard di aling — Enabled (allo w[...]

  • Page 488

    Page 488 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 —D C E —D T E • Equipment type — Terminal (send prompts/replies) — Host (suppress prompts/replies) • Long Break Detect In Figure 92 on page 489 and Figure 93 on page 490 , the rectangles represent the settings of service change paramete rs in LD11 that aff[...]

  • Page 489

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 489 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 92 Operating mode se lection—RS422 PRM = Off PRM = On OPE YES Host Virtual Leased Line? Ye s No HOT = On DTR = On Hotline? HOT = On HOT = Off Ye s No Allow Autobaud? No A UTB = Off Select BA UD A UTB = On BA UD = 7 Ye s T erminal Set remaining Operate P arame[...]

  • Page 490

    Page 490 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 93 Operating mode se lection—RS-232-C Operate Mode? DEM = DTE PRM = On DEM = DCE PRM = Off DEM = DCE PRM = On OPE YES DEM = DTE PRM = Off Dynamic DCD? DCD = Off DCD = On Hotline? HOT = On AUTB = Off Select BAUD HOT = Off Virtual Leased Line? Hotline? HOT = Of[...]

  • Page 491

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 491 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: Warning Tone Denied (WTD) defaults if DTA is entered. • If the DAC is u sed to call out thr ough modem pooling, where the modem pool consists of dumb modems c onnected to QMT8 SADM or QMT12 V.35 SADM, the DAC port should be configured w ith a secondary DN, whi[...]

  • Page 492

    Page 492 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Power supply Be sure that al l power requirements are met before installing the DAC. Operation may be affected by improper power and environmental condition s. EIA signals supported The DAC supports a subset of the standard signals. Only 8 leads can be brought through[...]

  • Page 493

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 493 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Environmental The DAC functions fully when operat ing within the following specified conditions. See Table 161. Reliability The DAC has a predicted mean time between failure (MTBF) of 8 years at 45 degrees Celsius. The mean time to repair (MTTR) is 1 hour. Installing [...]

  • Page 494

    Page 494 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Large System In Large Systems, the DAC is fully supported in IPE modules. These special slots on the DAC have 24-pair cables pre-wired to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) in card slots 0-15. Any IPE sl ot will supp ort the first four ports on the DAC if connections a[...]

  • Page 495

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 495 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation An upgraded backplane has three shrouds for each card slot. A backplane that cannot be upgraded has only two shrouds for each card slot. Port configuration Figure 94 on page 496 shows the port configu rations for both the RS-232-C and RS-422 ports. The software conf i[...]

  • Page 496

    Page 496 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 94 NT7D16 Data A ccess Card port connectors Note: Inser t on ly one option plug per por t. 553-5234 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 } } } } } } Po r t 0 Po r t 1 Po r t 2 Po r t 3 Po r t 4 Po r t 5[...]

  • Page 497

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 497 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Cabling Several cabling schemes are possible for both AILC and RILC modes. Typical capacitance for 24- and 26-gauge cables is shown in the Tables 163 and 164. RS-232 and RS-422 transm ission distance is limited by the electrical capacitance of the cable. Low-capacitan[...]

  • Page 498

    Page 498 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 95 Cabling to the data equipment System I/O connector MDF (12 connectors total) 25 pair 25 pair P atch panel DB25 DB25 553-AAA1128 RJ-11 DB25 RS-232 RJ-11 AILU RS-422 DB25 DB25 DB25 DB25 DB25 DB25 25 pair Octopus cable 25 pair[...]

  • Page 499

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 499 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 96 shows a connection throu gh an RJ-11 or RJ-45 jack located at the data station. It is reco mmended that f our wires be used similarly to the AIM drop when using the RJ-11 jack. Another cable is required to conv ert the RJ-11 or RJ-45 i nto DB25. Note: It is [...]

  • Page 500

    Page 500 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note: Use an octopus cable th at follows the pinout of the DAC , such as QCAD318A (female) and QCAD319A (male), in conjunction with a 50-pin female- to-female gend er converter. Figure 97 Patch panel layout DB25 DB25 50-pin connector 50-pin connector 553-5021[...]

  • Page 501

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 501 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 98 Octopus cabling MDF TxD RxD GND DTR CTS DSR DCD RI TxD RxD GND DTR CTS DSR DCD RI EIA signals from the D A C (unit 0) EIA signals from the D A C (unit 5) 2 (TxD) 3 (RxD) 7 (GND) 20 (DTR) 5 (CTS) 6 (DSR) 8 (DCD) 22 (RI) 2 (TxD) 3 (RxD) 7 (GND) 20 (DTR) 5 (CTS[...]

  • Page 502

    Page 502 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Backplane pinout and si gnaling Two 40-pin, and two 20-pin edge connectors conn ect the card to the backplane. The detailed pinout configurati ons are listed in Tables 165 and 166. Ta b l e 1 6 5 RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts f or f irst th ree D AC p orts (P art 1 of 2[...]

  • Page 503

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 503 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 7R 7 O-R DSR1 6 8T 33 R-G RI1 22 8R 8 G-R CTS1 5 9T 34 R-BR UNIT 2 TD2 2 RD A2 9R 9 BR-R RD2 3 RDB2 10T 35 R-S DTR2 20 SD A2 10R 10 S-R GND2 7 SDB2 Connector 11T 36 BK-BL DCD2 8 3 11R 11 BL-BK DSR2 6 12T 37 BK-O RI2 22 12R 12 O-BK CTS2 5 T abl e 165 RS-232-C and RS-42[...]

  • Page 504

    Page 504 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Ta b l e 1 6 6 RS-232-C and RS-42 2 pinouts for last three DA C por ts (Part 1 of 2) I/O cable Unit no. RS-232-C RS-422 Signal Patch pair or octopus Pai r Pin Pa i r color Signal Pin no. 13T 38 BK-G UNIT 3 TD3 2 RDA3 13R 13 G-BK RD3 3 RDB3 14T 39 BK-BR DTR3 20 SD A3 1[...]

  • Page 505

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 505 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuring the Data Access card LD 11 must be configured to accept th e DAC. The commands listed here must be answered. LD 20 prints out card information when requested. For a complete list of the service change prompts and responses, see Softw are Input/Output: Ad m[...]

  • Page 506

    Page 506 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 required. The defaults are bracketed, a nd may be is sued by Carriage Return (<CR>). LD 11 – Con figure Data Access card. ( Part 1 of 3) Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG MO V COPY Add, change, mo ve or cop y the unit TYPE: R232 R422 RS-232-C unit RS-42[...]

  • Page 507

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 507 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation HO T (OFF) ON Hotline If HO T = ON, then A UTB = OFF AU T (ON) OFF Automatic answer AU T B (ON) OFF Autobaud Prompt appears only if HO T - OFF BA UD 0-(7)-8 Baud rate, where: 0 = 110 1 = 150 2 = 300 3 = 600 4 = 1200 5 = 2400 6 = 4800 7 = 9600 8 = 19200 This prompt app[...]

  • Page 508

    Page 508 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 DLNG (ENG) FRN Data por t language, where: ENG = English FRN = Quebec French KBD (ON) OFF K eyboard di aling, wh ere: ON = enabled OFF = disabled (Ha y es dialing commands will still wor k) WIRE (OFF) ON Wire test mode, where: OFF = disabled ON = enabled PBDO (OFF) ON[...]

  • Page 509

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 509 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Printing the card parameters (LD 20) By responding R232, R422, or DAC to the TYPE prompt in LD 20, you can print out the configured parameters for each port, or the entire DAC. This is useful to determine if any parameters have been altered du ring keyboard or Hayes d[...]

  • Page 510

    Page 510 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Connecting Apple Macintosh to the DAC The Apple Macintosh can be connected wi th twisted pair wire to a port of a NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) to allow access to the switching capability. The Macintosh can then access local or remote terminals, personal computers, ho[...]

  • Page 511

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 511 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 99 Macintosh to DAC connection—9-pi n subminiature D Figure 100 Macintosh to DAC connection—min i-8 DIN Apple Macintosh 9-pin subminiature D 8 9 5 4 W BL BK Y RD A RDB SD A SDB MDF R3 T3 R2 T2 System D A C W BL BK Y 6-wire T eladapt cord 553-AAA1129 Apple M[...]

  • Page 512

    Page 512 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Large System and CS 1000M HG upgrade The DAC can be installed directly into slots 0, 4, 8, and 12 with no cablin g changes. If other slots are required, the upgrade must be made . Follow this procedure to upgrade your cabling. You can upgrade the cablin g segment-by-s[...]

  • Page 513

    NT7D16 Data Access card Page 513 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Segment 2 1 Leave cable K as is in slot L8. 2 Move cable end L-3 to L9-3. 3 Remove cable M from the backplane and connect ends M-1, M-2, and M-3 to L10-1, L10-2, and L10-3. 4 Add cable N to the I/O panel by connecting ends N-1, N-2, and N-3 to L11-1, L11-2, and L11-3.[...]

  • Page 514

    Page 514 of 894 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Be sure to re-label the MDF to show that the module has been upgraded to provide one cable for each IPE slot. The resulting backplane and cable arrangement should look like this: Backplane slot-connector I/O panel cable position L0 A L1 B L2 C L3 D (new cable) L4 E L5[...]

  • Page 515

    Page 515 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 532 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 516

    Page 516 of 894 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The Digital Line card provides 16 voice and 16 data communicati on links. NT8D02 Digital Line card The 32 port NT8D02 Digital Line card is supported in the MG 1000S and MG 1000S Expansion. You can install th is card in any IPE slot. NTDK16 Digital Line ca[...]

  • Page 517

    NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 517 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 101 Digital line card – faceplate 553-6160 Dgtl LC NT8D02 Rlse 04 Card lock latch Card lock latch LED[...]

  • Page 518

    Page 518 of 894 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Functional description NT8D02 Digital Line card The NT8D02 digital line card is equipp ed with 16 identical units. Each unit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signali ng path to and from digital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compr[...]

  • Page 519

    NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 519 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 102 Digital line card – block diagram Digital line interface Micro- controller 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM DS-30X loop Card LAN link Power supplies Front panel LED Card LAN interface Tip TCM loop interface circuit Digital phone lines Line interface un[...]

  • Page 520

    Page 520 of 894 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NTDK16 Digital Line card The NTDK16 digital line card is equipped with 48 i dentical units. Each unit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signali ng path to and from digital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplex ed (TC[...]

  • Page 521

    NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 521 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 103 NTDK16 DLC[...]

  • Page 522

    Page 522 of 894 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 lines carry multiplexed PC M voice, data, and signaling information as TCM loops. The purpose of each digital li ne interface circuit is to de-multiplex data from the DS-30X Tx channel into eight inte grated voice and data bitstreams. The circuits then tr[...]

  • Page 523

    NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 523 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card control functions Control functions are provi ded by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on the digital line car d. A sanity timer is pro vided to automat ically reset the card if the microcontroller stops fun ctioning for any reason. Microcontrol[...]

  • Page 524

    Page 524 of 894 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly serviced, it times out and causes the microcontroller to be har dware reset. Circuit power The +15 V dc in put is regulated do wn to +10 V dc for use by the digital line interface circuits. [...]

  • Page 525

    NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 525 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Digital line interface specifications Table 168 provides a technical summary of the digital line cards. T abl e 168 NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line c ard technical summary Charac teristics NT8D02 DLC description NTDK16B A DLC description NTDK16AA DLC descript[...]

  • Page 526

    Page 526 of 894 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Power requirements The digital line card needs + 15V DC over each loop at a maximum current of 80 mA. It requires +15V, -15V, and +5V from the backplane. The line feed interface can supply power to one loop of varyi ng length up to 1070 m (3500 ft) using [...]

  • Page 527

    NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 527 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Environmental specifications Table 170 shows the environmen tal specifications of the card. Connector pin assignments Table 171 shows the I/O pin desi gnations at the backplane connector, which is arranged as an 80-row by 2-colu mn array of pins. Normall[...]

  • Page 528

    Page 528 of 894 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 16A Line 4, Ring 16B Lin e 4, Tip 17A Line 5, Ring 17B Lin e 5, Tip 18A Line 6, Ring 18B Lin e 6, Tip 19A Line 7, Ring 19B Lin e 7, Tip 62A Line 8, Ring 62B Lin e 8, Tip 63A Line 9, Ring 63B Lin e 9, Tip 64A Line 10, Ring 64B Line 10, Tip 65A Line 11, Rin[...]

  • Page 529

    NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 529 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuration This section outlines the pr ocedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D02 Digital Li ne card and configuring the system so ftware to properly recognize the card. Figu re 104 on page 530 shows where the switches and jumper[...]

  • Page 530

    Page 530 of 894 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 104 Digital line card – jumper block and sw itch locations 553-6161[...]

  • Page 531

    NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 531 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 105 Digital line card – jumper block and sw itch locations 553-6161[...]

  • Page 532

    Page 532 of 894 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 533

    Page 533 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 534 NT8D03 Analog Line card Overview The NT8D03 Analog Line card provides an interface for up to 16 analog (500/2500-type) tel ephones. It is equipped with an 8051-family microprocessor that performs the following fun ctions: • control of card operation • card identification •s e l f -[...]

  • Page 534

    Page 534 of 894 NT8D03 Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 535

    Page 535 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 552 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 536

    Page 536 of 894 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note: A maximum of four NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line cards per MG 1000S and four NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line cards per MG 1000S Expansion are supported . Cards later than vintage NT8D 09AK support µ-Law and A -Law companding, and provide [...]

  • Page 537

    NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 537 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Physical description The circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm. by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The NT8D09 Analog M essage Waiting Li ne card circuits connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connect or. The backplane is cabled[...]

  • Page 538

    Page 538 of 894 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 106 Analog message waiting line card – faceplate 553-6165 Anlg M/WL C NT8D09 Rlse 0x Card lock latch Card lock latch LED[...]

  • Page 539

    NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 539 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card also provi des: • 600 ohms balanced terminatin g impedance • analog-to-digital and digital-t o-analog conversion of transmission and reception signals for 16 audio phone lines • transmission and recept[...]

  • Page 540

    Page 540 of 894 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 107 Analog message waiting line card – block diagram Input/ output interface control Micro- controller DS-30X interface 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM Async card LAN link Front panel LED Card LAN interface Line interface unit power Rx PCM 1 kHz frame s[...]

  • Page 541

    NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 541 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card interfaces The analog message waiting lin e card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data ove r the card LAN link. These interfaces are discussed in “Intelligent Peripheral Equi pment” on page 30 . Line interface[...]

  • Page 542

    Page 542 of 894 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Card control functions Control function s are provided by the following: • a microcontroller • a card LAN interface • signaling and control circuits on the analog me ssage waiting line card Microcontroller The analog message waiting line card co [...]

  • Page 543

    NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 543 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Analog line interface Input impedance The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a ret urn loss of: • 20 dB for 200-500 Hz • 26 dB for 500-3400 Hz Insertion loss On a station line-to-li ne connection, the total insertio n loss at 1 kHz is 6 dB[...]

  • Page 544

    Page 544 of 894 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Table 174 provides a technical sum mary of the analog message w aiting line card. Ta b l e 1 7 4 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card tec hnical summary Impedance 600 ohms Loop limit (excluding set) 1000 ohms at nominal -48 V (e xcluding set) Leaka[...]

  • Page 545

    NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 545 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements Table 175 provides the pow er requirements for the NT8D09 An alog Message Waiting Line card. Foreign and surge voltage protections In-circuit protection against power line crosses or ligh tning is not provided o n the NT8D09 Analog [...]

  • Page 546

    Page 546 of 894 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 service off-premise telephones, the NTAK 92 Off-premise protection module must be used. Check local regulati ons before provid ing such service. Overload level Signal levels exceeding +7 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion in speech transm[...]

  • Page 547

    NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 547 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The information in Table 177 on page 547 is provided as a reference and diagnostic aid at the backpl ane, since the cabling arrangement may vary at the I/O panel. See Communication Server 1000M and Meridi an 1: Large System Installation and Configurat[...]

  • Page 548

    Page 548 of 894 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 108 Analog messag e waiting li ne card – typical cross connection example 553-AAA1131 NT8D37 IPE Module Slot 0 NT8D09 Message Waiting Line Card 0T 0R 1T 1R 26 1 27 2 System Cross-connect OPS or ONS telephone connections with message waiting la[...]

  • Page 549

    NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 549 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuration This section outlines the pr ocedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card and configuring the system software to properly recognize th e card. Figure 109 on page 551 shows where the swi[...]

  • Page 550

    Page 550 of 894 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 the system for port -to-port loss. See Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for LD 97 service change instruct ions. T abl e 178 T ransmission Profile Changes Vintage A/D con vertor gain D/A con vertor gain Pre vious to AK –3.5 dB –2[...]

  • Page 551

    NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 551 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 109 Analog message waitin g line card – ju mper block and switch locati ons 553-6166[...]

  • Page 552

    Page 552 of 894 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 553

    Page 553 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 614 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 554

    Page 554 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card interf aces eight analog trunk lines to the system. Each trunk interface is independe ntly configured by softwa re control using the Trunk Administrati on program LD 14. You can install th is card in any I PE slot. Note: Each MG 100[...]

  • Page 555

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 555 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 179 lists the signaling and trunk types supp orted by the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Physical description The trunk and common multi plexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The NT8D14 Universal Tru[...]

  • Page 556

    Page 556 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red Light Emitting Diode (LED). See Figure 110 on page 557 . When an NT8D14 Univ ersal Trunk card is installed, the LED rem ains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test r uns. If the self-test is successful, the[...]

  • Page 557

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 557 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 110 Universal trunk card – faceplate S Univ Trk NT8D14 Rlse 0x Card lock latch Card lock latch This symbol indicates that field-selectable jumper strap settings are located on this card LED 553-6195[...]

  • Page 558

    Page 558 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Functional description Figure 111 shows a block diagram of the majo r functions contai ned on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Each of these functio ns is described on the following pa ges. Figure 111 NT8D14 Universal trunk card – bloc k diagram Input/ output in[...]

  • Page 559

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 559 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card interfaces The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card pa sses vo ice and signaling data over DS-30X loops, and maintenance data over the card LAN link. Th ese interfaces are described in “Intel ligent Peripheral Equipment” on page 30 . Trunk interface units The NT8D[...]

  • Page 560

    Page 560 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Card control functions Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface, and signaling and control circuits on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Microcontroller The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card contai ns a microcontroller that control s the [...]

  • Page 561

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 561 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation provides the means for analog loop terminations to establish, supervise, and take down call connections. Signaling interface All trunk signaling me ssages are th ree bytes long. The messages are transmitted in channel zero of the DS-3 0X in A10 format. Configurati[...]

  • Page 562

    Page 562 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the system in th e form of loop (in terrupting) dial pulses or DTMF ton es. Polarity-sen sitive/-i nsensitive pac ks feature The CS 1000 Release 4.0 software provides the polari[...]

  • Page 563

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 563 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 113 Loop start call connection sequence – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Idle B goes on hook A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end Meridian 1 B Far end CO High-resistance loop High-resistance loop High- resistance[...]

  • Page 564

    Page 564 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 For trunks not equipped wit h answer supe rvision, the PIP class of service is enabled and call-duration recording begi ns immediately up on near-end trunk seizure. The PSP and PIP classes of service are enabled in the Trunk Administration prog ram LD 14. Figure 1[...]

  • Page 565

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 565 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 115 Ground start call connection sequence – inco ming call from CO/FX/WATS A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Call presented to console loop key Console answers B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end Meridian 1 B Far end CO Tip [...]

  • Page 566

    Page 566 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Ground star t operation Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented throu gh software download messages. I n the idle state, the ti p conductor from th e CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring lead. Incoming c[...]

  • Page 567

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 567 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation A trunk identified as possibly reverse-wired is switched by the software to loop start processing after the second ring. This switching takes place on a call-by-call basis. Thus, if a previo usly correctly wired trunk becomes reverse-wired, the next incoming call [...]

  • Page 568

    Page 568 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 117 Ground start call connection sequence – inco ming call from CO/FX/WATS A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Call presented to console loop key Console answers B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end CO Tip open[...]

  • Page 569

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 569 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation reverse-wired trunk becomes correctly wi red, the first subsequent call clears the threshold counter and norm al gro und start processing is implemented . Note 1: The far-end can reverse battery and ground upon receipt of attendant answer. Note 2: The near-end pro[...]

  • Page 570

    Page 570 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 118 Ground start call states – outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS System (near) end High-resistance loop Ground on ring Forced near end disconnect Loop pulsing or DTMF Forced far end disconnect Near end originates Dial tone CO toll denial Idle Near end disconnec[...]

  • Page 571

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 571 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 119 Ground start call connection sequence – outg oing call to CO/FX/WATS A State Idle Idle B rings Trunk seizure Dial tone from CO B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end CO Tip open/ battery on ring Tip open/[...]

  • Page 572

    Page 572 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Direct inward dial operation Incoming calls An incoming call from the CO places a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 120 on page 573 and Fi gure 121 on page 574 . Dial pulses or DTMF tones are then presented from the CO. When the called [...]

  • Page 573

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 573 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 120 DID trunk, loop DR call s tat es – incoming call from CO Far end originates Battery-ground or loop pulsing or DTMF (Note) Note: The near end may be configured for immediate start, delay dial, or wink start. Forced far end disconnect Forced near end di[...]

  • Page 574

    Page 574 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 121 DID trunk, loop DR call c onnection sequence – incomi ng call from CO A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing A rings B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end CO High- resistance loop Address signaling H[...]

  • Page 575

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 575 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 122 Two-way, loop DR, T IE tr unk call states – incoming call from far-end PBX Battery-ground or loop pulse, or DTMF Far end originates Idle Far end hangs up (Note) Far end disconnects first Far end disconnects first Far end disconnects Near end disconnec[...]

  • Page 576

    Page 576 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 123 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trun k call connection sequence – inco ming call from far-end PBX A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing A rings B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end System Address signaling H[...]

  • Page 577

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 577 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Outgoing calls In an outgoing call configuratio n, the N T8D14 Universal Trunk card is connected to an existing PBX by a ti e trunk. See Figure 124 on page 578 and Figure 125 on page 579 . An outgoing call from the near-end seizes the trunk facility by placing a l[...]

  • Page 578

    Page 578 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 124 Two-way, loop DR, T IE tr unk call states – outgoing call to far-end PBX System (near) end Far end PBX High-resistance loop Ground on tip, battery on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or loop pulse or DT[...]

  • Page 579

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 579 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 125 Two-way, loop DR, T IE trunk call connection sequence – outg oing call to far-end PBX A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing B rings A goes on hook Idle B goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end PBX Address signaling High-r[...]

  • Page 580

    Page 580 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 126 Two-way, loop DR, T IE tr unk call states – outgoing call to far-end PBX System (near) end Far end PBX High-resistance loop Ground on tip, battery on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or loop pulse or DT[...]

  • Page 581

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 581 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 127 Two-way, loop DR, T IE trunk call connection sequence – outg oing call to far-end PBX A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing B rings A goes on hook Idle B goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end PBX Address signaling High-r[...]

  • Page 582

    Page 582 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Senderized operation for DI D and two-way loop DR trunks Incoming calls If the far-end is senderized, the near -end can operate in any mode: Immediate Start (IMM), Delay Dial (DDL) or Wi nk (WNK) start, as assigned at the STRI prompt in the Trunk Administ ration p[...]

  • Page 583

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 583 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 128 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk ca ll states – incoming call th rough senderized, tand em PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk System (near) end Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or loop pulsing, or DTMF (Note 1) Far end [...]

  • Page 584

    Page 584 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 129 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk ca ll states – incoming call th rough senderized, tand em PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk System (near) end Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or loop pulsing, or DTMF (Note 1) Far end [...]

  • Page 585

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 585 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: Pseudo-answer supervision is provided by n ear-end at expiration of end-of-dial timer. Wher e no far-end answer supervisio n is provided, the party at the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination. Outgoing automatic, i ncoming dial operat[...]

  • Page 586

    Page 586 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 130 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states – outgoing call thro ugh far-end PBX to CO/FX/WATS System (near) end Far end High-resistance loop Ground on tip, battery on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or lo[...]

  • Page 587

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 587 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 131 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call st ates – incoming call from far-end PBX System (near) end Low-resistance loop High-resistance loop Far end originates Battery-ground or loop pulses, or DTMF Far end Far end disconnect Forced near end disconnects Idl[...]

  • Page 588

    Page 588 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 132 Two-way, loop OA ID, TIE trunk call connection sequence – inco ming call from far-end PBX A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing A rings B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end PBX High- resistance loo[...]

  • Page 589

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 589 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 133 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states – outgoing call to far-end PBX System (near) end Near end originates Far end disconnect Near end disconnect Idle Near end disconnects first Far end answers 553-AAA1147 Far end disconnects first Ground on tip, [...]

  • Page 590

    Page 590 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 134 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trun k call connection sequence – ou tgoing call to far-end PBX A State Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end PBX High- resistance loop Low-resistance loop High-resistance loop High-resistance loop Ground on tip/ b[...]

  • Page 591

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 591 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Recorded announcement trunk operation Note: Refer to “Multi-Chan nel RAN modes” on page 593 for information on Multi-Ch annel RAN modes, which are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk. When configured for Recorded Announcement (RAN) operation, a trunk [...]

  • Page 592

    Page 592 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 135 Connecting RAN equipment to the NT 8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical) Typical customer- provided external equipment Cross connect System NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 7 NT8D37 IPE Module MDF 0T Slot 0 A 26 (W-BL) Announcer 0R 1 (BL-W) [...]

  • Page 593

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 593 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation RAN modes of operation Figure 136 on page 594 shows the relati onship of control signals to message playback for the operating modes available in announ cement machines. The signal names shown in Figure 136 are typical. Note 1: For continuous operation mode, conne[...]

  • Page 594

    Page 594 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The Route Data Block LD 16 is used to configure a RAN route in Multi-Channel Level Star t/Control mode, using the following response: RTYP = MLSS Figure 136 RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE) — Continuous operation mode — C ST+ input to announcer hardwir[...]

  • Page 595

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 595 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Trunk members are provisioned in the Trun k Data Block LD 14. Refer to “Programming RAN trunks” on page 596 and to Software Input/ Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for instructions o n service change programs. Continuous operation mod e In the continuous [...]

  • Page 596

    Page 596 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Call routing to RAN trunks CS 1000 Release 4.0 software control s recorded announcement machines. These programs detect the calls to be intercepted, determine the type of intercept treatment required (for example, overflow, attendant, announcement), queue the inte[...]

  • Page 597

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 597 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Electrical specifications Table 180 gives the electrical characteris tics of the NT8D14 Un iversal Trunk card. T abl e 180 Universal trunk card – trunk interface electrical characteristics (Part 1 of 2) T runk T ypes Characteristic CO / FX / W A TS DID / TIE RAN[...]

  • Page 598

    Page 598 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Power requirements Power to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk car d is provid ed by the mo dule power supply (ac or dc). Ring detection 17 to 33 Hz 40 to 120 V rms N/A N/A N/A Line leakage Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, [...]

  • Page 599

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 599 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Foreign and surge voltage protection The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card m eets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage (power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements. Environmental specifications Table 182 lists the environmental sp ecifications for the NT8D14 Unive[...]

  • Page 600

    Page 600 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The class-of-service determines the operation of the switchable PADs contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows: • Transmission Compensated — used for a two-wire non-VNL trunk faci lity with a lo ss of greater than 2 dB for which impedance compensat [...]

  • Page 601

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 601 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The insertion loss from IPE ports to IPE ports is as follows: T abl e 183 Insertion Loss from IPE P or ts to IPE P orts (measured in dB) IPE P orts IPE P orts 500/2500 Line Digital Line 2/4 Wire E&M T runk 4 Wire (ESN) E&M Tr u n k CO/FX /W A TS Loop Tie T[...]

  • Page 602

    Page 602 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Connector pin assignments The universal trunk card connects the eight analog trunks to the backplan e through a 160-pin con nector shroud. Telep hone trunks connect to the universal trunk card at the back of the MG 1000S using a 25-pin connector. A list of the con[...]

  • Page 603

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 603 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuration The trunk type for each unit on the card as well as its terminating impedance and balance network configuration is se lected by software service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap sett ings on the card. NT8D14 has a reduced jum[...]

  • Page 604

    Page 604 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Ta b l e 1 8 5 Jum per strap setti ngs – factory stand ard (NT8D14B A, NT8D14BB) T runk type s Loop length Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) CO/FX/W A TS 0–1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Of f 1–2 1–2 2-wa y TIE (LDR) 2-wa y TIE (O AID) DID[...]

  • Page 605

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 605 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 186 Jum per strap se ttings – e xtended ra nge (NT8D14B A, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB) T runk type s Loop length Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) CO/FX/W A TS > 1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 2–3 2-wa y TIE (LDR) 2-wa y TIE (O AI[...]

  • Page 606

    Page 606 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Jumper strap settings For most applicatio ns, the jumper strap settings remain set to the standard configuration as shipped from the factory. See Table 185 on page 604 . The jumper strap settings must be changed, as shown in Table 186 on page 605 , for the f ollow[...]

  • Page 607

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 607 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • DID trunks exceeding a loop resistance of 600 ohms • RAN trunks operating in pulse st art or level start modes Figure 137 on page 608 shows jumper locations on the universal trunk card (vintage BA ). Service change entries The trunk type, terminating impedan[...]

  • Page 608

    Page 608 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 137 Universal trunk card – jumper locations (for NT8D14BA, NT8D14B B Release 9 and below) J1.4 J2.4 3 1 J4.4 3 1 J3.4 J1.5 J2.5 31 J3.4 31 J4.5 J1.1 J2.1 31 J3.1 31 J4.1 J1.6 J2.6 13 J4.6 13 J3.6 J1.7 J2.7 13 J4.7 13 J3.7 J1.3 J2.3 3 1 J4.3 Unit 3 Unit 1 [...]

  • Page 609

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 609 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 188 T runk types – terminati on impedance an d balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) T runk types T erminating impedance (Note 1) Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) 0–915 m (0–3000 ft) 915–1524 m (3000–5000 ft) > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) CO[...]

  • Page 610

    Page 610 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Port-to-port lo ss configuratio n Loss parameters are selected on th e NT8D14 Universal Trunk card by a switchable pad controlled by codec emul ation software. For convenience, the pads settings are called “in” and “out.” Pad settings are det ermined by th[...]

  • Page 611

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 611 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows: • TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facili ty with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which impedance com pensation is provided, o r [...]

  • Page 612

    Page 612 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Applications The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks. Paging trunk operation A universal trunk card unit can be confi gured as a paging trunk. Configure units as paging [...]

  • Page 613

    NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 613 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 138 Connecting paging equ ipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical) Typical customer- provided external equipment Cross connect System NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 7 NT8D37 IPE Module MDF 0T Slot 0 A 26 (w-bl) 0R 1 (bl-w) 0A 27 ([...]

  • Page 614

    Page 614 of 894 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 615

    Page 615 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 654 NT8D15 E & M Trunk card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 616

    Page 616 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note: In Cabinet systems equipped with Meridian Mail, the Universal Trunk line card cannot be installed in sl ot 10 of the main cabinet. The NT8D15 E&M trunk card supports the following types of trunks: • 2-wire E&M Type I signaling trunks • two-wire dia[...]

  • Page 617

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 617 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Physical description The line interface and co mmon multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The E&M trunk card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. External equipment conne[...]

  • Page 618

    Page 618 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 139 E&M trunk card – fac eplate S E & M Dict Trk NT8D15 Rlse 05 Card lock latch Card lock latch This symbol indicates that field-selectable jumper strap settings are located on this card LED 553-6199[...]

  • Page 619

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 619 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Functional description The NT8D15 E&M Trunk card serves various transmission requirements. The trunk circuits on the card can operate in either A-Law or µ-Law companding modes. The mode of operation is set by service chan ge entries. Figure 140 on page 620 sho[...]

  • Page 620

    Page 620 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • Software co ntrol of A/µ-Law mode . • Software control of digit collection. Figure 140 E&M trunk card – blo ck diagra m Input/ output interface control Micro- controller DS-30X interface 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM Async card LAN link Front panel LED Card LAN[...]

  • Page 621

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 621 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card interfaces The E&M trunk card passes voice and signal ing data over DS-30X loops an d maintenance data over t he card LAN link. The E&M trunk card contains four identical and in dependently configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circui[...]

  • Page 622

    Page 622 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Trunk circuit features Trunk unit functions The functions provided by each unit on the E&M trunk car d include 2-wire signaling, 4-wire signaling, and paging operatio n as follows: • 2-wire, E&M Type I signaling (see Figure 141 on page 623 ) wi th: — nea[...]

  • Page 623

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 623 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 141 E&M Type I signaling E E&M trunk card External signaling circuit M E M 553-6258 Ð 48V Ð 48V[...]

  • Page 624

    Page 624 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 142 E&M Type II signaling Ð 48V SG E M SB Ð 48V SG E P P M SB 553-6259 Note: M, SB, E, and SG designations are Electronic Industries Association and Telecommunications Industries Association (EIA/TIA) conventions. These leads are also known as MB, MA, E[...]

  • Page 625

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 625 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 143 4-wire DX signaling Tip B T1 J3 J5 T2 (Note 2) Ring B a b Tip A Ring A a b Distant circuit electromechanical (may also be Succession 1000M, Succession 1000, or Meridian 1) Local system circuit Ð 48V Ð 48V 4 8 553-AAA1151 1100 Ω (Note 1) K1 R C R eq 1[...]

  • Page 626

    Page 626 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 144 Paging trunk operation Typical customer- provided external equipment Cross connect System NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 3 NT8D37 IPE Module MDF 0T Slot 0 A 26 (W-BL) 0R 1 (BL-W) 0A 27 (W-O) 0PG 2 (O-W) Module I/O Panel Connector Part of 25-[...]

  • Page 627

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 627 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card control functions Control functi ons are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and signaling and control circuits on the E&M trunk card . Microcontroller The E&M trunk card contains a microcon troller that controls the internal operation of the ca[...]

  • Page 628

    Page 628 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Signaling interface All signaling messages for the trunk are three bytes long. Th e messages are transmitted in channel zero of the DS30X in A10 format. Configuration infor mation for the E & M trunk is download ed from the CPU at power up and by command from m [...]

  • Page 629

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 629 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • monitor signals from the trunk in terface and generate a message when required for each state change • control disabling and enabling of uni t or card • control A-Law and µ-Law o peration modes • control transmission pad settings Maintenance features The[...]

  • Page 630

    Page 630 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Idle state For E&M signaling, in the idle state the M lead is ground and the E lead is an open circuit. Outgoing calls are processed as follows: • The M lead changes from ground to battery. — If answer supervisio n is provided by the far end, there is a chan[...]

  • Page 631

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 631 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 146 E&M Type I signaling pattern s – originating party release Near end M lead Near end E lead Idle Near end disc first Near end disc Dialing Near end seizes Far end answers (ans sup) Far end answers (no ans sup) 553-6263 Far end disc Far end disc firs[...]

  • Page 632

    Page 632 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 147 E&M Type I signaling pattern s – originating party rele ase on a tandem connection Near end M lead Near end E lead Near end stores office DN Dial CO/FX/WATS and office D CO/FX/WATS end disc first (ground start only)(ans sup) Pseudo-answer supervisio[...]

  • Page 633

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 633 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Incoming calls The far-end initiates calls as follows: • The ground is placed on the E lead in E&M signaling. • Dial pulses are subsequently applied from the far-end as ground open on the E lead. • If the far-end is equippe d for sending, the syst em can [...]

  • Page 634

    Page 634 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 for a tandem connection where the originat ing end is senderized and the route is over a CO trunk (CCSA not applicable). Type II signaling uses four leads: M, SB, E, and SG. Instead of changes of state between battery and ground (M signals) or open and groun d (E si[...]

  • Page 635

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 635 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 148 E&M Type II sign aling patter ns – originati ng party releas e Near end M/SB leads Near end EA/EB leads Idle Near end disc first System end disc Dialing Near end seizes Far end answers (ans sup) Far end answers (no ans sup) 553-AAA1153 Far end disc[...]

  • Page 636

    Page 636 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 149 E&M Type II s ignaling pa tterns – originatin g party rele ase on a ta ndem conn ection Near end M/SB leads Near end EA/EB leads Near end stores office DN Dial CO/FX/WATS and office DN CO/FX/WATS end disc first (ground start only)(COS-ans sup) Pseud[...]

  • Page 637

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 637 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 193 and Table 194 show call-connection and take-down sequencing fo r DX signaling. Table 195 on page 638 and Tab le 196 on page 639 show sequencing where the E&M trunk card is used in a tandem PBX. T abl e 193 DX signaling – outgoing calls with originat[...]

  • Page 638

    Page 638 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 F ar-end on hook first Current flow Hig h Network taken down and trunk idled No current flow High Near-end on hook first, network ta ken do wn Current flow Low F ar-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High Ta b l e 1 9 5 DX signaling – outgoing calls w ith or[...]

  • Page 639

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 639 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Near end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low F ar end on hook, trunk i dled No current flow High T abl e 196 DX signaling – incoming calls with origin ating par ty relea se on tandem connections Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk de[...]

  • Page 640

    Page 640 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note: * – CO ground start: the trunk is idled and the network taken down, but the incoming tie trun k is controlled by the origi nating end. Electrical specifications Table 197 lists the electri cal characteristics of th e trunk interface on the E&M trunk card[...]

  • Page 641

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 641 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements Table 199 lists the power requirements for the E&M trunk card. Signaling type Loop Ground or loop star t F ar-end battery -42 to -52. 5 V -42 to -52.5 V Near-end batter y N/A -42. 75 to -52.5 V Minimum loop current N/A 20 mA Ground potential [...]

  • Page 642

    Page 642 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Environmental specifications Table 200 provides the en vironmental specifications for the E&M trunk card. Foreign and surge voltage protection The E&M trunk card meets CS03 over-vo ltage (power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements. Connector pi[...]

  • Page 643

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 643 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation See the Communication Server 1000S: Installation and Conf iguration (553-3031-210) for complete I/O connector information and wire assignments for each tip/ring pair. T abl e 201 E&M trunk card – backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes Tr u n k Number 2-wire P agi[...]

  • Page 644

    Page 644 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 1 16B TA 16A TB 16B TA 16A TB 17B RA 17A RB 17B RA 17A RB 18B E 18A M 18B EA 18A EB 19B ECG 19A ESCG 19B MA 19A MB 2 62B TA 62A TB 62B TA 62A TB 63B RA 63A RB 63B RA 63A RB 64B E 64A M 64B EA 64A EB 65B ECG 65A ESCG 65B MA 65A MB 3 66B TA 66A TB 66B TA 66A TB 67B RA[...]

  • Page 645

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 645 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 150 E&M trunk card – typical cross connection exam ple 553-AAA1155 NT8D37 IPE Module Slot 0 NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 3 26 1 27 2 System Cross connect E & M trunk connections A MDF TipA TipB RingA RingB E M ECG ESCG Tip Ring E M 28 3 29[...]

  • Page 646

    Page 646 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Configuration Each of the four trunk circuits on th e E&M trunk card can be individually configured for trunk type, companding mo de, and port-to-port loss compensation. Configuring the card requires both jump er changes and configuration software service entrie[...]

  • Page 647

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 647 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 151 E&M trunk card – jum per locatio ns 553-6200[...]

  • Page 648

    Page 648 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Ta b l e 2 0 3 E&M trunk card – jum per strap setti ngs Jump e r (Note 1) Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk Ty p e I Paging Ty p e I T ype II DX tip & ring pair M—rcv E—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J[...]

  • Page 649

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 649 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service entries The trunk type is selected by making service change entries in Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maint enance (LD 16). The companding mode is selected by making service change entries in Trunk Data Block (LD 14). Refer to Table 203 on page [...]

  • Page 650

    Page 650 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switch able pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows: • TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk faci lit y with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which imp edance compensation is prov ided, or [...]

  • Page 651

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 651 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 152 Pad orientation Analog 553-AAA1156 System XMT Analog REC REC Port B E&M XMT Digital[...]

  • Page 652

    Page 652 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Applications The optional applications, features and signaling ar rangements for each trunk are assigned through uniqu e route and trunk data blocks. Refer to the Features and Services (553-3001-306) for info rmation about assign ing features and services to trunks.[...]

  • Page 653

    NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 653 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 205 shows the insertion loss from IPE port to IPE po rt. Paging trunk operation When used in the paging mode, a trunk is connected to a customer-pro vided paging amplifier system (not zone sel ectable). When the trunk is accessed by dial-up or attendant-key o[...]

  • Page 654

    Page 654 of 894 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 153 Paging trunk operation Typical customer- provided external equipment Cross connect System NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 7 NT8D37 IPE Module MDF 0T Slot 0 A 26 (w-bl) 0R 1 (bl-w) 0A 27 (w-o) 0PG 2 (o-w) Module I/O Panel Connector Part of 2[...]

  • Page 655

    Page 655 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 668 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 656

    Page 656 of 894 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • NT6D39 CPU/Network module • NT9D11 Core/Network module The SDI paddle board is comp atible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the system option s listed above. It does not support 20 mA current loop interface. Physic[...]

  • Page 657

    NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 657 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 154 NT8D41AA SDI paddle b oard Option switches LED Enable/disable switch Port 1 connector (RS-232C) Option switches Port 2 connector (RS-232C) Option switches Backplane mating connectors 553-5979[...]

  • Page 658

    Page 658 of 894 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Functional description The NT8D41AA SDI paddle board has two asynchronous serial ports. These serial ports are connected to the I/O pane l in the back of the shelf using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the system to [...]

  • Page 659

    NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 659 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation a socket in the CPU area of the backplane allows it to work only when that CPU is active. The SDI paddle board is normally inst alled into a socket in the network area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the system processo[...]

  • Page 660

    Page 660 of 894 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Configuring the SDI paddle board Configuring the SDI paddle board consist s of setting these option switches for each serial port: • Port addr ess • Baud rate • DTE/DCE/Fiber mode The SDI paddle board has seven option switches, SW 2–8. Figu[...]

  • Page 661

    NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 661 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Option switch settings Address Address select switch SW4 and logi c on the card always address the two UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 15 and 16. The settings for this switch are sh own in Table 207. Baud rate Switches SW2[...]

  • Page 662

    Page 662 of 894 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 DTE/DCE/Fiber mode Each serial port can be co nfigured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card. Instru ctions for setting the switch es SW5, SW6, SW7, and SW8 are shown in Table 2 09 on p[...]

  • Page 663

    NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 663 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 209 NT8D41AA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings Mode P ort 1 – SW5 Po r t 1 – S W 6 123456123456 DTE (terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on off of[...]

  • Page 664

    Page 664 of 894 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 156 SDI paddle board option sw itch locations 553-5988 12 34 O N ^ 12 34 O N ^ 56 12 34 O N ^ 12 34 O N ^ 12 34 O N ^ 56 12 34 O N ^ 56 12 34 O N ^ 56 DS1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW1 J1 J2 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 Address selection P or t 1 DTE/DCE mode selectio[...]

  • Page 665

    NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 665 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service changes Once the NT8D41 SDI paddle board has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recogni ze it. This is done u sing the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions fo r running the Confi[...]

  • Page 666

    Page 666 of 894 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Applications The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface paddle board is used to connect the switch to a variety of communication devi ces, printers, and peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be co nnected to either of the card’s two serial port[...]

  • Page 667

    NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 667 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 157 SDI paddle board cabling Module front NT8D46 cable to connector J2 in the pedestal, where it will connect to the system monitor (Note 2) NT8D93 cable (Note 1) To external equipment Backplane J1 J2 NT8D84 cable N T 8 D 4 1 J1 System monit[...]

  • Page 668

    Page 668 of 894 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 669

    Page 669 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 682 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 670

    Page 670 of 894 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • NT6D39 CPU/Network module • NT9D11 Core/Network module The QSDI paddle board is compatible w ith all existing system software, but can only be used with the system options listed above. It does not suppo rt the 110 baud rate or the 20 mA[...]

  • Page 671

    NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddl e Board Page 671 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 158 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board 1 234 O N ^ 1234 O N ^ 1234 O N ^ 1234 O N ^ 56 1234 O N ^ 56 1 2 34 O N ^ 56 1234 O N ^ 56 Address selection for ports 1 and 2 (See T able 6) P ort 1 DTE/DCE mode selection (See T able 7) P ort 4 DTE/DCE[...]

  • Page 672

    Page 672 of 894 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Other logi c on the card includes baud rate gener ators, RS-232 -C driver/ receiver pairs, and the switches and logic needed to co nfigure each UART. System considerations In dual-processor systems, the QSDI paddle board will behave differentl[...]

  • Page 673

    NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddl e Board Page 673 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The QSDI paddle board is no rmally inst alled into a socket in the network area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the system processors. This is necessary because the active CPU switches automatically each night at [...]

  • Page 674

    Page 674 of 894 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 8 CTS Clear to send (Not e 1) Clear to send Note 1: In DTE mode the signals CD , DSR, an d CTS ar e tied to +12 v olts to signify that the por t on the QSDI pa ddle board is always ready to transmit and receiv e data. This mode is set to conne[...]

  • Page 675

    NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddl e Board Page 675 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuring the QSDI paddle board Configuring the QSDI paddl e board to wo rk in a system consists of setting these option switches for each serial port: •B a u d r a t e • Port addr ess • DTE/DCE mode The QSDI paddle board has fourteen[...]

  • Page 676

    Page 676 of 894 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 * For future use . Address Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the card always address the four UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 a nd 3 throug h 14 and 15. Th e settings for both switches are show n in Table 212. To avoid system probl [...]

  • Page 677

    NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddl e Board Page 677 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation SW15 and SW16 must not be configured identically. Figure 158 on page 671 displays SW15 and SW16. * T o enable por ts 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. T o enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON. + F or each X, the setting for this [...]

  • Page 678

    Page 678 of 894 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 DTE/DCE/Fiber mode Each serial port can be co nfigured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card. Instru ctions for setting the swi tches SW2, SW3, SW4, SW5, SW6 , SW7, SW8, and SW9 ar[...]

  • Page 679

    NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddl e Board Page 679 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service changes Once the NT8D841BA QSDI paddle board has been install ed in the system, the system software needs to be c onfigured to recognize it, using th e Configuration Record program LD 1 7. Instructions for running this progra[...]

  • Page 680

    Page 680 of 894 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Applications The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Inte rface paddle board is used to connect the switch to a variety of communicat ion devices, printers, and peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to either of the card’s two s[...]

  • Page 681

    NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddl e Board Page 681 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 160 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling Module front NT8D46 cable to connector J4 in the pedestal, where it will connect to the system monitor (Note 2) NT8D93 cable (Note 1) To external equipment Backplane J1 J2 NT8D84 cable N T 8 D 4 1[...]

  • Page 682

    Page 682 of 894 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 683

    Page 683 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 688 NTAG26 XMFR card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 MF signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 684

    Page 684 of 894 NTAG26 XMFR card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Table 214 lists the frequency va lues used for received signals. Ta b l e 2 1 4 MF frequency v alues Digit Back war d direction DOD-Tx, DID-Rx 1 700 Hz + 900 Hz 2 700 HZ + 1100 Hz 3 900 Hz + 1100 Hz 4 700 Hz + 1300 Hz 5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz 6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz 7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz[...]

  • Page 685

    NTAG26 XMFR card Page 685 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation XMFR receiver specifications Table 215 provides the operating requir ements for the NT A G26 circuit card. T abl e 215 XMFR receiver specifications (P art 1 of 3) Coding: Mu-La w Input sensitivit y: must accept: 0 to -25 dBmO must reject: -35 to dBmO Frequency sensitivity: m[...]

  • Page 686

    Page 686 of 894 NTAG26 XMFR card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Noise Rejection: Error Rate in White Noise Better than: < 1/2500 calls T est: 10 digit calls nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms KP duration 100 ms SNR = -20 dB all digits Immunity to Impulse Noise Better than: < 1/2500 calls T est: 10 digit calls nominal [...]

  • Page 687

    NTAG26 XMFR card Page 687 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The XMFR receiver specifications conform to the following: • TR-NPL-000258, Compatib ility Information for F.G.D. switched access service, Bell Communica tion Research Technical Reference, Issue 1.0, October 1985. • TR-NPL-000275, Notes on the BOC Intra-LATA Networks, Be[...]

  • Page 688

    Page 688 of 894 NTAG26 XMFR card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Physical specifications The physical specifications required by the NTAG26 XMFR circuit card are shown in Table 216. Ta b l e 2 1 6 Physical specifications Dimensions Height:12.5 in. (320 mm) Depth:10.0 i n. (255 mm) Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm) F aceplate LED Lit when the c[...]

  • Page 689

    Page 689 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 696 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 690

    Page 690 of 894 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Ports 1 and 3 are configured as DCH. Ports 0 and 2 are configured as SDI (not supported). See Tabl e 217. Each pair is controlled by a switch, as shown in Table 218. Note: Digital Private Network Sig nali ng System DPNSS can replace the DCH function in the U.K. T abl e 21[...]

  • Page 691

    NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Page 691 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Two ports offer the option for DTE/DCE configuratio n. This option is selected from a jumper on the card. Ta ble 219 shows the jumper settings. T abl e 219 Jumper settings Po r t Jump e r location Strap for DTE Strap for DCE Jump e r location RS422 RS232 0 J10 C - B B - A[...]

  • Page 692

    Page 692 of 894 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Connecting to the ports External devices are connected to the SDI/DCH card by the following: • the NTAK19FB four-port SDI cable. Th is cable does not have to be terminated at the cross connect te rminal since it is equipped with connectors. • the NE-A25-B cable. Termi[...]

  • Page 693

    NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Page 693 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 221 NT AK02 connections at the cro ss-connect ter minal – P ort 1 RS422 RS232 Cable Signal Designat ions I=Input O=Output Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pa i r Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 5T 5R W- S S-W SCTEA — SCT A — O — I — O — I —[...]

  • Page 694

    Page 694 of 894 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Ta b l e 2 2 2 NT AK02 connections at the cr o ss-connect terminal – Port 2 RS422 RS232 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Designat ions I=Input O=Output Signal Pai r Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 13T 13R BK-G G-BK — — — — — O — I — DTR —[...]

  • Page 695

    NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Page 695 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 223 NT AK02 connections at the cro ss-connect ter minal – P ort 3 RS422 RS232 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Designati ons I=Input O=Output Signal Pai r Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 17T 17R Y- O O-Y SCTEA — SCT A — O — I — O — I ?[...]

  • Page 696

    Page 696 of 894 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Characteristics of the low speed port Ports 0 and 2 are asynchronous, low speed ports. They transfer data to and from the line one bit at a time. The characteristics of the low speed port are as follows: • Baud rate: 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 96 00; 19,200 Default = 1[...]

  • Page 697

    Page 697 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 708 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 698

    Page 698 of 894 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Physical description The DTI/PRI card uses a 9.5" by 12.5" multilayer printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. The clock controller and D-ch annel daughterboards are fastened by standoffs and connectors. See Figure 161 on page 698 . The [...]

  • Page 699

    NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 699 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The first five LEDs operate as follows: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self-test is in progress, th e LEDs flash three times and then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 224. T abl e 224 NT AK09 LED states LED State Defini[...]

  • Page 700

    Page 700 of 894 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NTAK09 DTI/PRI power on self-test When power is applied to the NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card, the card performs a self-test. The LEDs direct ly associated with the NTAK09 circuit card are DIS, ACT, RED, YEL, and LBK. The clock controller LED is also included in the p[...]

  • Page 701

    NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 701 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation NTAK93 self-test The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard LED is the bottom LED on the faceplate of the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card. The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard does not perform a self-test when power is applied to it. When power is applied, it tu rns red and remain steadily lit, i[...]

  • Page 702

    Page 702 of 894 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The NTAK09 circuit card conforms to sa fety and performance standards for foreign and surge voltage prot ection in an internal environm ent. Functional description NTAK09 provides the followin g features and functions: • configurable parameters, including A-Law a[...]

  • Page 703

    NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 703 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Architecture Signaling interface The signaling interface perfor ms an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages in both directions of transmission are three bytes long. Interconnection The interconnection to the carri[...]

  • Page 704

    Page 704 of 894 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Digital pad The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-ou tput transfer function meets the character istics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad accommodates both µ255-law and A -Law coding. There are 32 combinations each for µ255 to µ255, µ255[...]

  • Page 705

    NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 705 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation D-channel interface The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps maxi mum, full-duplex, s e rial bit-stream configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output, transmit data input, receive clock out put, and transmit clock output. The receive and tran[...]

  • Page 706

    Page 706 of 894 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 extend from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable through dip-switches. The settings are sh own in Table 227. Receiver The receiver extracts data and clock fr om an incoming data stream and outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst cas[...]

  • Page 707

    NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 707 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Clock controller interface The clock controller interf ace provides the recovered clock from the external digital facility to the clock control ler daughterboard through the back plane. Depending on the equipped state of the clock controller, th e clock controller [...]

  • Page 708

    Page 708 of 894 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 709

    Page 709 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 722 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 710

    Page 710 of 894 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Physical description The 2 Mb DTI pack uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5", multi-l ayer printed circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8” wide and contains six LEDs. The LEDs operate as follows: • After the card is plugged in, the LEDs (a-e) are turned on by the po[...]

  • Page 711

    NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 711 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements The 2MB DTI obtains its power from the backplane. It draws less than 2 A on +5 V, 50 mA on +15 V and 50 mA on –15 V. Environment The NTAK10 card meets all applicab le Nortel Networks operating specifications. Functional description The NTAK10 provi[...]

  • Page 712

    Page 712 of 894 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • Card-LAN for maintenance comm unication • per-channel and all-channel loopback capabilit ies for near-end and far-end •s e l f - t e s t • download of inco ming ABCD v alidation times from software • warm SYSLOAD (TS16 AS 16 transmitted) Applicability to Fr[...]

  • Page 713

    NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 713 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 10 bits in a 10 message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps). Transmit data To transmit data on the carrier, the incoming serial bit stream from the NTAK02 circuit card is converted to 8- bi[...]

  • Page 714

    Page 714 of 894 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • receiving TS16 messages from th e TS16 microprocess or and passing these messages to the A07 • providing the 19.2 Kbps seri al interface to the Card-LAN • controlling LEDs • downloading Local Cal ling Areas (LCAs) • monitoring errors and alarms • detectin[...]

  • Page 715

    NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 715 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation If a coaxial interface is required, use NT5K85 in con junction with the NTBK05. Channel associated signaling Channel associated signa ling means that each traffi c carrying channel has its own signaling channel perm anently associated with it. Time slot 16 is used to t[...]

  • Page 716

    Page 716 of 894 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 With the exception of the outpulsing si gnals and special signals, such as Denmark's Flash signal and Sweden's Parking signal, the minimum duration of any signal state is 100 ms. Some sign al states can have a minimum duratio n time that is longer than 100 ms[...]

  • Page 717

    NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 717 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation converted from digit al to AMI and sent to the carrier. A transforme r provides isolation and imp edance matching (75 oh ms or 120 ohm s). Rx Direction The AMI data of the carrier is converted to digital and fed to the in put selector as well as the output selector for[...]

  • Page 718

    Page 718 of 894 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Tracking mode There are two stages to clock controller tracking: • tracking a reference, and • locked onto a reference. When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the inco ming clock. When the freque[...]

  • Page 719

    NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 719 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Clock controller functions and features The NTAK10 2MB DTI clock controller functions and features include: • phase-locking to a reference, generating the 10.24 Mhz system clock, and distributi ng it to t he CPU thro ugh the backpl ane. Up t o two references at a tim[...]

  • Page 720

    Page 720 of 894 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 secondary, but switches over to the primary whenever the primary recovers. If the primary recovers first, then th e clock controller tr acks to the primary. If the software command “track to secondary” is given, the clock controller tracks to the secondary referenc[...]

  • Page 721

    NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 721 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Reference clock interface The recovered clock derived from the facility is available on the MDF connector. The signals at these c onnectors conform to the electrical characteristics of the EIA RS-422 standard. Switch settings Various 2MB DTI switch options exist on the[...]

  • Page 722

    Page 722 of 894 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 723

    Page 723 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 732 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 724

    Page 724 of 894 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note: The card is restricted to slots 1 th rough 3 in EMC- type cabinets (such as NAK11Dx and N TAK11Fx cabinet s). It will not work in slots 4 through 10 in these cabinets. The NTAK20 clock controller card can support 1.5 Mb , 2.0 Mb, and 2.56 Mb clock [...]

  • Page 725

    NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Page 725 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • jitter filterin g • use of an algorithm to detect crystal agin g and qualify clocking information Clocking modes The clock controller can operate in one of two modes : tracking or non-tracking (also known as free-run). Tracking mode In tracking mod[...]

  • Page 726

    Page 726 of 894 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Free-run (non- tracking) In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any outside source. Instead, it provides its ow n inte rnal clock to the system. This mode can be used when the system acts as a master clock source for other systems[...]

  • Page 727

    NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Page 727 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Functional description The main functional b locks of the NTAK20 architecture include: • phase difference detector circuit • digital Phase Locked Loop (PLL) • clock detection circuit • digital-to-analog conv erter • CPU MUX bus interface • si[...]

  • Page 728

    Page 728 of 894 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 System clock specificat ion and ch aracteristic s Since the accuracy requirements for CC ITT and EIA Stratum 3 are different, it is necessary to have two TCVCXOs which feature different values of frequency tuning sensitivit y. See Table 233. EIA/CCITT co[...]

  • Page 729

    NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Page 729 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation without software interventi on. If both re ferences are out of specification, the clock controller provides ho ldover. Autorecovery and cha tter If the command “track to primary” is gi ven, the clock contro ller tracks to the primary reference and co[...]

  • Page 730

    Page 730 of 894 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Holdover and free-run In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal , or when sudden changes occur on the incoming re ference due to error bursts, the clock controller provides a stable holdover. Free-run mode is initiated when the clock[...]

  • Page 731

    NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Page 731 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation backplane line. It designates the DTI/PR I motherboard as a primary refe rence source. The secondary reference is ob tained from another DTI/PRI card, which is designate d by a technician. No o ther clock sources are used. External timing interface The c[...]

  • Page 732

    Page 732 of 894 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 733

    Page 733 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 750 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 734

    Page 734 of 894 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems th at are clocked from different Central Offices (COs) if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. Physical description The NTAK79 uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer prin[...]

  • Page 735

    NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 735 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation RED On (Red) A red alarm state has b een detected. This represen ts a local alar m state of: Loss of Carrier (LOS) Loss of F rame (LF AS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. YEL On (Y ellow) A yellow alar m state h as been detecte d. This repr[...]

  • Page 736

    Page 736 of 894 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NTAK79 switches The NTAK79 card incorporates four on-bo ard dip switches. The tab les that follow provide infor mation on the various settin gs and related functions of these switches. Note: The ON positio n for all the switches is tow ards the bottom of the card. This[...]

  • Page 737

    NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 737 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 162 NTAK79 card with switch locations 12 12 12 12 553-7869.EPS LEDs Jack Faceplate Switch 1 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 2 NTAK79[...]

  • Page 738

    Page 738 of 894 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Switch SW1 – DCHI Configuration This switch enables/disables the on-board DCHI and sets the operating mode of the DCHI. DPNSS1 m ode is not su pported at this time. Fo r all other countries that do not use DPNSS, use Q.931 mode. Switch SW2 – Carrier Impedance Confi[...]

  • Page 739

    NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 739 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Switch SW4 – Carrier Shield Grounding This switch enables for the selective groun ding of the Tx / Rx pairs of the carrier cable. Closing the switch (do wn position) app lies Frame Ground (FGND) to the coaxial car rier cable shield, creat ing a 75 ohms unbalanced co[...]

  • Page 740

    Page 740 of 894 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI • transmission of remote alarm when instructed • slip-buffering receive messages • supporting National and Int ernational bits in time slot 0 • on-board clock controller • onboard D-channel [...]

  • Page 741

    NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 741 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface circuitry. The DS-30X timeslot number is mapped to the PCM-30 channel number. Timeslots [...]

  • Page 742

    Page 742 of 894 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Signaling interface The signaling interface consis ts of the A07 DS-30X si gnaling controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link through the DS-3 0X timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length. Carrier interface The E1 interface connectio[...]

  • Page 743

    NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 743 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Impedance matching The line interface provides fo r the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by a switch, as shown in Table 240. Note: The ON positio n for all the switches is tow ards the bottom of the card. This is [...]

  • Page 744

    Page 744 of 894 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 requirements of the CCITT recomm endation G.742. This provides jitter attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequenc y range from about 6 Hz to 6 KHz. Transmitter functions The transmitter takes the bi nary (dual unipolar) data fr om the PCM transceiver an[...]

  • Page 745

    NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 745 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • receive clock output • transmit clock output The receive and transmit clocks have sl ightly different bi t rates from each other, as determined by the tr ansmit and receive carrier clocks. The NTAK79 has an onboard D-Channel Handler Interface (D CHI). It is the [...]

  • Page 746

    Page 746 of 894 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Card-LAN interface A Dual Port UART handles the fun ctions of the serial ports for t he Card-LAN serial link and the echo can celler/test port interface. The echo/test interface is an asynchronous 4800 bps 8-bit connected to port A of th e UART. The Card-LAN interface [...]

  • Page 747

    NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 747 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation If the incoming clock reference is stab le, the internal clock con troller will track it, lock onto it, and match frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however, environmental circumstances will cause the external or internal clocks to drift. When this happens, th e inter[...]

  • Page 748

    Page 748 of 894 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • jitter filterin g • use of an algorithm to detect crystal aging and to qu alify clocking information Reference sw itchover Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference failure. When performance of the refe rence degrades to a point where[...]

  • Page 749

    NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 749 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation A time-out mechanism prev ents chatter due to rep eated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources. Holdover and free-r un In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal , or when sudden changes occur on the incoming re ference[...]

  • Page 750

    Page 750 of 894 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 751

    Page 751 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 756 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 752

    Page 752 of 894 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Inte rface daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 — system parameters are service changeable (system parameters are downloaded from software) — incoming Layer 3 message valida tion procedures are implemented in the D-PORT f irmware — supported message unit s and inform ation elements c[...]

  • Page 753

    NTAK93 D-channel Ha ndler Interface dau ghterboard Page 753 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Faceplate LEDs NTAK09 1.5 Mb PRI and NTBK50 2.0 MB PRI cards LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09 and NTBK50 cards. The DCHI LED is dual-color (red and gr een). The LEDs are described in Table 243. Power consumption Power consumpt[...]

  • Page 754

    Page 754 of 894 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Inte rface daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 DMA controller A Z80A-DMA chip controls the data transfer between local RAM memory and communication ports. The DMA cha nnels are only used in the receive direction (from line to SS C), not in t he transmit di rection. Random Access Memory (R[...]

  • Page 755

    NTAK93 D-channel Ha ndler Interface dau ghterboard Page 755 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The port will operate at: The address of ports is se lected by hardwired back plane card address. Port characteristics and LAPD paramet ers are downloaded from software. D-Port — SDTI/PRI interface Below is a brief description of sign als.[...]

  • Page 756

    Page 756 of 894 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Inte rface daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 757

    Page 757 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 760 NTBK22 MISP card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 758

    Page 758 of 894 NTBK22 MISP card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Refer to ISDN Basic Rat e Interface: Inst allation and Configuration (553-3001-218) and ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Features (553-3001-3 80) for additional information. Functional description Each MISP can support 4 line cards (U ILC or SILC or any combination of the two). Ea[...]

  • Page 759

    NTBK22 MISP card Page 759 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation High-Level Data Link Controller (HDLC) The HDLC is a format converter that supp orts up to 32 serial channels that communicate at speeds up to 64 kbps. The HDLC converts mess ages into the following two message form ats: • a serially transm itted, zero-insert ed, CRC prote[...]

  • Page 760

    Page 760 of 894 NTBK22 MISP card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 761

    Page 761 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 772 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 762

    Page 762 of 894 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in th e MG 1000S. Th e card is not supported in the MG 1000S Expansion. Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems th at are clocked from different Central Of fices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The [...]

  • Page 763

    NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 763 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 163 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards NTAK20 Clock Controller NTAK93 or NTBK51 D-Channel Interface SW2 SW4 1 2 1 2 SW1 1 2 Stiffeners Connector Sockets LEDs Bantam Jacks Standoffs DIS ACT RED YEL LBK CC DCH RCV XMT On Off On Off On Off 553-7872 553-CSE[...]

  • Page 764

    Page 764 of 894 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The LEDs are described in Table 244. Ta b l e 2 4 4 NTBK50 faceplate LEDs (Part 1 of 2) LED State Definition OOS On (Red) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is disab led or out-of-ser vice. Also , the state of the card after power-up , completion of self test, and exit[...]

  • Page 765

    NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 765 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements The NTBK50 obtains its power from th e backplane, drawing up to 2 A on +5 V, 35 mA on +1 5 V and 20 mA on –15 V. Environment The NTBK50 meets all applicable Nort el Networks operating specifications. Functional description NTBK50 provides the foll[...]

  • Page 766

    Page 766 of 894 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI • transmission of remote alarm when instructed • slip-buffering receive messages • support of National and Internati onal bits in timeslot 0 • clock controller daugh terboard • D-channel int[...]

  • Page 767

    NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 767 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation message format; eight are assigned t o voice/data (64 Kbps ), one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps). The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control. The signal ing bits are extracted and [...]

  • Page 768

    Page 768 of 894 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Signaling interface The signaling interface consis ts of the A07 DS-30X si gnaling controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling li nk via the DS-30X timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length. Carrier interface For the E1 interface, the co n[...]

  • Page 769

    NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 769 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Impedance matching (Switch SW2) The line interface provides fo r the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by SW2, as shown in Tab le 246. Note: The ON position for all th e switches is toward the bottom of the card. T[...]

  • Page 770

    Page 770 of 894 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Carrier Shield groundin g (Switch SW4) Table 248 lists the Carrier Shield ground switch settings. Note: The usual method is to ground th e outer conductor of the receive coax signal. Receiver functions The receiver extracts data an d clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark I[...]

  • Page 771

    NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 771 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation CEPT transceiver The transmitter and receiver functions ar e used for synchronization, channel, and signal extraction. The functions m eet applicable specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.703 and G.732. The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.0[...]

  • Page 772

    Page 772 of 894 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 mode, which is not supported at this time. The DDCH supports only a single port which directly interfaces to th e PRI motherboard. See Table 249. Card-LAN interface A Dual Port UART handles the fun ctions of the serial ports for t he Card-LAN serial link test port inte[...]

  • Page 773

    Page 773 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 778 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 774

    Page 774 of 894 NTBK51 Downloada ble D-channel Handl er daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 — DCH inter face — layer 3 preprocessor — traffic reporting including link capacity Physical description The NTBK51 daughterboard interfaces w ith the system C PU and is mounted on either the NTAK09 1.5 DTI/PRI card or the NTBK50 2 [...]

  • Page 775

    NTBK51 Downloadable D-ch annel Handler daughterboard Page 775 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Functional description The main functional b locks of th e NTBK51 architecture include the following: • Microprocessors •M a i n m e m o r y • Shared memory • EPROM memory • Flash EPROM memory •E E P R O M m e m o r y • Seri[...]

  • Page 776

    Page 776 of 894 NTBK51 Downloada ble D-channel Handl er daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Main memory The main 68EC020 system memory is comprised of 1 Mbyte of SRAM and is accessible in 8 or 16 bits. The software , base code and application reside in main RAM and is dow nloaded from the so ftware through the shared memory. Sha[...]

  • Page 777

    NTBK51 Downloadable D-ch annel Handler daughterboard Page 777 o f 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Sanity timer A sanity timer is incorporated on the DDCH to prevent the MPU from getting tied-up as the result of a hardware or software fault. If the MPU encounters a hardware or software fault and ent ers a continuous loop, the sanity ti[...]

  • Page 778

    Page 778 of 894 NTBK51 Downloada ble D-channel Handl er daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 download depends on the result of the check m ade by the CPU on the MSDL base code and application software. If a forced download enable command is execut ed in LD 96, the MSDL base code and application are forced down to the DDCH card, e[...]

  • Page 779

    Page 779 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 798 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 780

    Page 780 of 894 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The cards are identified by a two-letter suffix to the product co de called the vintage. The card vintage is based on whether PPM is equipped or not, and the individual countries where the card is being installed. The cards listed below are minimum v[...]

  • Page 781

    NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 781 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Physical description The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards have eight units. Each unit connects to th e shelf backplane through an 80-pin connector. The backplane is cabled to th e I/O panel which is then cabled to the cross-c[...]

  • Page 782

    Page 782 of 894 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 • provide 4 dB dynamic attenuation pads on a per call basis • allow individual units or th e entire board to be disabled by software • provide software selectable A- law or µ-law compandin g • indicate self-test status during an automatic or[...]

  • Page 783

    NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 783 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Call placed by Central Office The Central Office initiates a call by applying ringing between the tip and ring wires. If the call is answered, the ringing detector on the trunk card is switched out and a low resistance dc lo op is placed between the[...]

  • Page 784

    Page 784 of 894 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Electrical specifications Power requirements Table 251 shows the power requir ements for the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards. Note 1: Analog cir cuitry is pow ered with +/ -12 V generat ed from +/-15 V. The maximum current im[...]

  • Page 785

    NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 785 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Pad switching The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards support the Nort h American loss plan . Software configuration allows the selection of 4 dB loss pads on a per unit basis. Note: The tolerance for the above nomin al values i[...]

  • Page 786

    Page 786 of 894 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 164 NTCK16 Central Office trunk co nnections for NT8D37 I/O pa nel connectors A, E, K, R Pi n s Pa i r Co l o r I / O P a ne l C onne c t or U ni t Nu m b e r AE KR 26 1 W- BL BL - W Un it 27 2 W- O O-W 0 28 3 W- G G-W Un it 29 4 W- BR BR - W [...]

  • Page 787

    NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 787 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 165 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors B, F , L, S Pi n s Pa i r Co l o r I / O P a ne l C onne c t or U ni t Nu m b e r B FLS 26 1 W- BL BL -W Un i t 27 2 W- O O- W 0 28 3 W- G G- W Un i t 29 4 W- BR BR -[...]

  • Page 788

    Page 788 of 894 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 166 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors C, G, M, T Pi n s P a i r Co l o r I / O P a ne l C onne c t or U ni t Nu m b e r CG M T 26 1 W- BL BL -W Un i t 27 2 W- O O- W 4 28 3 W- G G - W SSSS U n i t 29 4 W- [...]

  • Page 789

    NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 789 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation NTCK16AX Central Office trunk card Route Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown. LD 16 – Route Data Block for NTCK16AX. Prompt Re sponse Description REQ: NEW Define a new unit TYPE: CO T Define a new Route Data Block CUST xx Customer [...]

  • Page 790

    Page 790 of 894 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Trunk Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown: LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16AX . (Part 1 of 2) Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new trunk unit TYPE: CO T Central Office T runk TN T er minal Number l s c u F ormat for [...]

  • Page 791

    NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 791 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: These prompts are required only for the first unit defined on each NTCK16AX card. PPID Freq Min pulse detection 03 16Kz >70ms 04 12Kz >70ms Country BTID Cadence Brazil, Tortola 10 25 0 ms +/- 50 ms on/off Mexico 10 250 ms +/- 50 ms on/of[...]

  • Page 792

    Page 792 of 894 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NTCK16BX Central Office trunk card Route Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown: LD 16 – Route Data Block for NTCK16BX. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new unit. TYPE: CO T Define a new Route Data Bloc k. CUST xx Customer[...]

  • Page 793

    NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 793 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Trunk Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown: LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16BX. (Part 1 of 2) Prompt Response Des cription REQ: NEW Define a new trunk unit. TYPE: CO T Central Office T runk TN T er minal Number l s c u Format for[...]

  • Page 794

    Page 794 of 894 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note 1: These prompts are required only for the first unit defined on each NTCK16BX card. (DIP) DTN Digitone sig naling, (digipulse) (P10) P1 2 P20 Make-break ratio f or pulse dialing speed. LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16BX. (Part 2 of 2) Prom[...]

  • Page 795

    NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 795 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation BTID values by country Country BTID Cadence Brazil Tortola 10 250 ms +/- 50 m s on/off Mexico 10 250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off Mexico 8 375 ms on/off Singapore 11 750 m s on/off Ireland 3 500 +/- 50 ms on/off Ireland 9 375 - 750 ms on/off Kuwait, Chile 6 [...]

  • Page 796

    Page 796 of 894 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Detection limits Pulses detected by the NTCK16AX circuit card must be w ithin the following limits: Busy tone detect Busy tone is sent by the Central Office to indicate the release of an established call. Detection limits The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX ge[...]

  • Page 797

    NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 797 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Therefore the followi ng steps must be followed when the Generic XFCOT is installed: 1 Define Loss Switching mode. Respond to the prompts in LD 97 as shown. 2 Define Loss Switching Class Of Service. Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown. LD 97 ?[...]

  • Page 798

    Page 798 of 894 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Equivalencies The following equivalencies do apply: • XFCOT COT SHL is equivalent with XUT COT TRC • XFCOT COT LOL is equivalent with XUT COT NTC. The entries TRC and NTC will no lo nger be allowed for the Generic X FCOT. Trunk to Trunk connectio[...]

  • Page 799

    Page 799 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 812 NTDK20 Small System Controller card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 800

    Page 800 of 894 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 The NTDK20GA SSC card has the follo wing components and features: • NTTK25 daughterboard Flash memory, NTAK19 SIMM mo dule (16 MB) DRAM, and Backup memory Note: The NTTK13 daughterboard is still supported. • up to two 100BaseT IP daughterboards • two[...]

  • Page 801

    NTDK20 Small System Controller card Pag e 801 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 167 NTDK20 SSC card and expansion dau ghterboard in the Call Server Ports 1 & 3 for 100BaseT daugh terboard Flash ROM Drive PCMCIA Drive Connector for 2n d 100BaseT daughterboard. MG 1000S systems 1 and 3 Ports 2 and 4 for Media Gateways 2 and [...]

  • Page 802

    Page 802 of 894 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Memory The majority of system and customer co nfigur ed data is both controlled and stored on the NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash ROM. An active and backup copy of customer data is also kept on the Flash ROM. In the event of data loss, the NTDK 20 SSC card also [...]

  • Page 803

    NTDK20 Small System Controller card Pag e 803 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 100BaseT IP daughterboards A 100BaseT IP Daughterboard mounted on the NTDK20 SSC card enables the connection of the Call Server to a MG 1000S. See Figure 167 on page 801 . Each daughterboard increases the number of confer ence channels by 32. The maximum [...]

  • Page 804

    Page 804 of 894 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 168 NTDK83AA dual-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard Figure 169 NTDK99A single-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard[...]

  • Page 805

    NTDK20 Small System Controller card Pag e 805 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: If not connecting point-to -point , connect the Call Server and MG 1000S using a straight-through Et hernet UTP Cat 5 cable. Call Servers can be connected to MG 1 000S systems in the following ways: • Use 100BaseT to connect to the LAN for voice d[...]

  • Page 806

    Page 806 of 894 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 170 Call Server connection to Media Gateway 1000S systems For further information or install ation instructions, refer to the Communication Server 1000S : Installation and Configuration (553-3031-210). PC card interface The NTDK20 SSC card has a PC [...]

  • Page 807

    NTDK20 Small System Controller card Pag e 807 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Security device The NTDK20 SSC card in each MG 100 0S must contain a NTDK57DA Security device, a remote dongle (NT_Rem) which is keyed to match the NTDK57AA Security device on the Call Server and a standard dongle (NT_STD). This maintains the requir ement[...]

  • Page 808

    Page 808 of 894 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 SDI ports The NTDK20 SSC card in both the Call Server and the MG 1000S systems contains three SDI ports used to connect on-site termin als or remote termin als through a modem. Table 255 shows the po rt default settings. Conferencing Thirty-two conference [...]

  • Page 809

    NTDK20 Small System Controller card Pag e 809 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The MG 1000S 10BaseT po rt can run in Normal mode or Survival mode. In Normal mode, the MG 1000S does not provide access to maintena nce or alarm management. External connections to the 10BaseT por t are provided by a 15-pin connecto r located on the back[...]

  • Page 810

    Page 810 of 894 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Ta b l e 2 5 6 MG 1000S and MG 1000S Expansion slot assignments MG 1000S/MG 1000S Expansion First Second Th ird Fo urth Phys ical card slot Logical card slot Physical card slot Logical card slot Phys ical card slot Logical card slot Physical card slot Logi[...]

  • Page 811

    NTDK20 Small System Controller card Pag e 811 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 171 MG 1000S slots Media Gateway 1000 553-AAA1991[...]

  • Page 812

    Page 812 of 894 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 172 MG 1000S Expansion slots 553-AAA1992 Media Gateway 1000 and Media Gateway 1000 Chassis Expansion[...]

  • Page 813

    Page 813 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 826 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 814

    Page 814 of 894 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 To provide CEMUX communication with th e card, changes are also required to create an I/O entry for the card. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in th e MG 1000S. Th e card is not supported in the MG 1000S Expansion. Up to four digital trunk s are sup[...]

  • Page 815

    NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 815 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 173 NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller O O S AC T R ED YEL LBK C C D C H RCV XMT NTRB21 TMDI SW ON 1 2 3 4 DCH F/W LEN 0 LEN 1 Len 2 553-CSE9024 Stiffeners NTAK93/51 Clock Controller Mounting Holes Connector Socket Connector Pins LEDs Bantam Jacks Stan[...]

  • Page 816

    Page 816 of 894 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 In general, the first five LED s operate as follows: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times, then go into their appropriat e states, as shown in Table 257. Figure 174 on page 817 s[...]

  • Page 817

    NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 817 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 174 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate 55 3-C SE0 007 OOS AC T RE D YEL LB K CC DC H TM D I Monit o r Po r t RS232 MA INT Rx Tx[...]

  • Page 818

    Page 818 of 894 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Foreign and surge voltage protection Lightning protectors must be installed be tween an external T1 carrier facility and the system. For p ublic T1 facilit ies, this protectio n is provided b y the local operating company. In a private T1 facility en vironment (a[...]

  • Page 819

    NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 819 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software description Changes from the NTAK09 are required for the new trunk card and License parameters are n service change and maintenance overlays. There is a change to CardLAN to introduce a new CardLAN ID. Th e download of PSDL data is also changed to handle[...]

  • Page 820

    Page 820 of 894 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 175 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate TMDI Rx Tx OOS ACT RED YEL LBK CC DCH .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... MAINT RS232 Monitor Port[...]

  • Page 821

    NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 821 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Microprocessor The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the following ma jor tasks: • Task handler: also referred to as an executive. The task handler provides orderly per-channel task execution to m aintain real-time task ordering cons[...]

  • Page 822

    Page 822 of 894 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 D-channel interface The D-channel interface is a 64 kbps, full- duplex, serial bit- stream configured as a Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (D CE) device. The data signals include: • receive data output • transmit data input T abl e 258 Digital pad val ues [...]

  • Page 823

    NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 823 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • receive clock output • transmit clock output The bit rate of the receive and transmit clocks can vary slightly from each other. This is determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks. Feature selection th rough software co nfiguration for the D -chan[...]

  • Page 824

    Page 824 of 894 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Cross-connect – Level 1 (DSX-1), or LD -1. Equalizers are switch selectable through dip-switches. The settings are sh own in Table 259. Receiver The receiver extracts data and clock fr om an incoming data stream and outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst[...]

  • Page 825

    NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 825 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Connector pinout The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15 position Male D-type connector. NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard Digital Trunking requires synchronized clo cking so that a shift in one clock source results in an equivalen[...]

  • Page 826

    Page 826 of 894 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems th at are clocked from different COs, if th e COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. Clock rate convert er The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL synchron[...]

  • Page 827

    Page 827 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 832 NTVQ01xx Media Card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 Hardware architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 828

    Page 828 of 894 NTVQ01xx Media Card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 176 NTVQ01xx Media Card The NTVQ01xx Media Card provides faceplate and back plane interfaces, which are used to connect external LA Ns. This section provides information on the faceplate conn ectors and indicators.[...]

  • Page 829

    NTVQ01xx Media Card Page 829 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Hardware architecture The Media Card comes in two versi ons: 8-port and 32 -port. Faceplate connectors and indicators Figure 177 on page 830 shows the NTVQ01xx Me dia Card faceplate. Reset switch The reset switch on the faceplate manually resets the Media Card. Status LED[...]

  • Page 830

    Page 830 of 894 NTVQ01xx Media Card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 177 NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate HEX Display Maintenance Port Ethernet Activity LEDs PCMCIA Slot Reset Button MC Enable LED Lock Latches J2 A: 100 10 A E T Reset NTVQ01AA 553-MIRAN0001[...]

  • Page 831

    NTVQ01xx Media Card Page 831 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation RS-232 Asynchronous Maint enance Port An 8-pin mini-DIN socket on the NT VQ01xx Media Card faceplate provides access to the RS-232 port. This faceplate port can provide access to the Media Card for OA&M purposes. The maintena nce port is also available through a femal[...]

  • Page 832

    Page 832 of 894 NTVQ01xx Media Card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 833

    Page 833 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 838 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 834

    Page 834 of 894 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Functional description Figure 178 on page 835 shows the ITG-P card f aceplate components. The information in this section de scribes the components. Faceplate components NWK The faceplate connector labeled NWK is a 9-pin, sub-miniature D-type connector. The connecto[...]

  • Page 835

    NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Page 835 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 178 NTVQ55AA ITG-P card faceplate Note: There are no Ethernet status LEDs for the ELAN management interface. ITG-P NWK NTVQ55AA NWK Status Reset Maint Port A: 553-CSE9150 Ethernet Voice Port ITG-P LED (card status) NWK LEDs (Ethernet) Reset Switch Type III PC[...]

  • Page 836

    Page 836 of 894 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 NWK Status LED NWK Status LEDs display the TLAN interface card Ethernet activity: • Green – on if the carrier (link pulse) is received from the TLAN interface card Ethernet hub. • Yellow – flashes when there is TL AN interface card data activity. During heav[...]

  • Page 837

    NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Page 837 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • alternate connection to th e serial maintenance po rt DS-30X • Card LAN interfaces DS-30X voice/ signaling DS-30X carries Pulse Code Modul ation (PCM) voice and proprietary signaling on the backplane betw een the ITG-P card and the SSC. Card LAN Card LAN carri[...]

  • Page 838

    Page 838 of 894 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 839

    Page 839 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 856 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 840

    Page 840 of 894 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Each system can accommodate up to ei ght ESDI cards, for a total of 16 synchronous ports per system. The ESDI cards can be housed in the netwo rk slots of any of the following modules: • NT5D21 Core/Netw ork module (slots 0 through 7) • NT6D39 C[...]

  • Page 841

    QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 841 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 179 CPC513 ESDI card front panel LED Card lock latch Card lock latch 553-5981 CSL/ ESDI Q P C 5 1 3 ENB DIS J1 J2 ESDI port 2 connector ESDI port 1 connector Enable/disable switch[...]

  • Page 842

    Page 842 of 894 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Functional description The QPC513 ESDI card is an intelligent, two -port synchronous serial data interface card. See Figure 180. The tw o serial input/output data ports terminate on DB-25 connectors on the front panel of the card. Each port operates[...]

  • Page 843

    QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 843 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation The QPC513 ESDI card is an intelligent con troller. The local micro-processor performs all of the overhead associated with synchronous data transfer. The system processor passes data to the ESDI card processor a byte at a time using conventional mem[...]

  • Page 844

    Page 844 of 894 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Clock timing option The ESDI card offers two timing options: • Internal: The ESDI card uses an in ternal timing source to synchronize data transfers to the external device. • External: The ESDI card accepts a ti ming source from the high-speed i[...]

  • Page 845

    QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 845 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Fault detection Firmware on the ESDI card detects hardwa re faults on t he card and link lev el LAPB protocol faults. It reports the faults to the CPU when predetermined thresholds (downloaded at initializatio n) have been exceeded. Fault isolation [...]

  • Page 846

    Page 846 of 894 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Electrical interfa ce options Interface options are selected by inserti ng jumper plugs into the appropriate sockets on the card: • RS-232-C interface: The EIA RS-232-C interface can be used for speeds up to 19.2 kbps and d istances of less than 1[...]

  • Page 847

    QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 847 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Connector pin assignments Table 263 shows the pin assignments for J1 and J2 when t he port is configured for RS-232-C interface, and Table 264 on page 848 shows the pin assignments for J1 and J2 when th e port is configured for the high-speed interf[...]

  • Page 848

    Page 848 of 894 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 17 Receiver signal element timing (DCE) — 3 DD 24 T ransmitter signal element timing (DTE) 3 — DA Ta b l e 2 6 4 Connector J1 and J2 pin assignment s – high-speed interface (Part 1 of 2) Pin numb er Signal func tions Signal source EIA circuit [...]

  • Page 849

    QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 849 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Timing 12 T ransmitter signal element tim- ing (DTE) – lead B — 3 DD (B) 14 T ransmitter signal element tim- ing (DCE) – lead B — 3 DB (B) 15 T ransmitter signal element tim- ing (DCE) – lead A — 3 DB (A) 17 T ransmitter signal element t[...]

  • Page 850

    Page 850 of 894 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Configuring the ESDI card Configuring the ESDI card consists of setti ng the port addresses using the address selection switch and setting the port in terface options using the jumper blocks. The system software must then be configured to recognize [...]

  • Page 851

    QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 851 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation DTE/DCE mode ju mper settings The interface for each ESDI port is conf igured independently. Ports must be configured both for electrical interf ace (RS-232-C or high-speed) and mode (DTE or DCE). With the proper options set: • An ESDI port config[...]

  • Page 852

    Page 852 of 894 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 182 ESDI card option sw itch locations 553-5983 S1 S2 DS1 J1 J2 UB9 UB10 UB11 UB12 UA9 UA10 UA11 UA12 UB16 UB17 UB18 UB19 UA16 UA17 UA18 UA19 Address selection Note: Ports 1 and 2 shown with jumper plugs installed for DCE and RS-232-C operati[...]

  • Page 853

    QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 853 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service changes All of the other ESDI port operating parameters are defined in software and downloaded to the assigned ESDI port. See Table 261 on page 84 3 . These changes are made using the Configuration Record pro gram (LD 17). Instructi[...]

  • Page 854

    Page 854 of 894 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 parameters. These parameters must be set for each ports if both ports are being used. LD 17 – Serial port configura tion parameters . Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change configuration. TYPE: CFN Configuration type. IO TB YES Change input/o[...]

  • Page 855

    QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 855 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Applications The QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data In terface card is used any time that a high-speed, fully synchronous serial data com munication channel is n eeded. The ESDI card is typically used to connect to the following: • Meridian Mail • A ho[...]

  • Page 856

    Page 856 of 894 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 183 QPC513 ESDI card cabling Cables to peripherals NT8D95 cables (Note 1) NT8D82 cables I/O panel Module front Q P C 5 1 3 J1 J2 Port 2 Port 1 Card front panel Backplane Filter adapters (Note 2) Meridian Mail Meridian Link : 553-5984 Note 1: [...]

  • Page 857

    Page 857 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 872 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 858

    Page 858 of 894 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 QSDI cards are housed in the following modules: • NT5D21 Core/Netw ork module (slots 0 through 7) • NT6D39 CPU/Network module (slo ts 1 through 9, and 13) • NT6D60 Core module (slots 0 through 5) • NT8D35 Network module (slots 5 through 13) • [...]

  • Page 859

    QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 859 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 184 QPC841 QSDI card front panel LED Card lock latch Card lock latch 553-5985 ENB DIS J1 J2 Ports 2, 3, and 4 connector (non-standard) Port 1 connector (RS-232C) Enable/disable switch QPC841 QSDI[...]

  • Page 860

    Page 860 of 894 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Functional description The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains all the logic for four asynchronous serial ports, including th e baud rate generators. These serial ports are directly accessed by the syst em processor using memory reads and wr[...]

  • Page 861

    QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 861 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 185 QPC841 QSDI card block diagram UART no. 1 UART no. 2 UART no. 3 UART no. 4 UARTs Address decode logic TD RD TD RD TD RD TD RD RS-232-C drivers and receivers Clock and bit rate select logic Processor bus 553-5986 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 J1[...]

  • Page 862

    Page 862 of 894 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Connector pin assignments Connector J1 is connected to port one, and uses the RS -232-C standard DB-25 pinout. Connector J2 is connected to ports two, three, and four, and is a non-standard pinout that requires an adapter cable. An adapter cable (NT8D96[...]

  • Page 863

    QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 863 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 269 Connector J2 pin assignments (Part 1 of 2) Pin Number Po r t Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode 1 FGD F rame ground F rame ground 2 TD T ransmitted data T ransmitted data 3 RD Received data Rece ived data 4 RTS Req uest to send ([...]

  • Page 864

    Page 864 of 894 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Configuring the QSDI card Configuring the QSDI card consists of setting these option switches for each serial port: • Port addr ess • Baud rate • DTE/DCE mode Figure 186 on page 868 shows the location of the option switch es on the QSDI card. Inst[...]

  • Page 865

    QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 865 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation select the addresses for ports 1 and 2. Switch SW15 is used to select the addresses for ports 3 and 4. T abl e 270 QSDI card address s witch settings SW14 Po r t 1 Po r t 2 Switch settings SW15 Po r t 3 Po r t 4 12345678 Device pair addresses 0 1 off of[...]

  • Page 866

    Page 866 of 894 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Baud rate switch se ttings Table 271 lists the switch settings necessary to set the b aud rate. Ta b l e 2 7 1 QSDI card baud rate switch settings Baud rate P ort 1 – SW10 P ort 2 – SW 11 P ort 3 – SW12 P or t 4 – SW13 1234123412341234 150 off o[...]

  • Page 867

    QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 867 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation DTE/DCE mode switch sett ings Table 272 shows the DTE/DCE mode sel ection switches for the four serial ports. Test switc h setting Switch SW16 is only used for factory testing; all of its switches must be set to OFF for proper operation. T abl e 272 QSD[...]

  • Page 868

    Page 868 of 894 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Figure 186 QSDI card option sw itch locatio ns 553-5987 SW1 DS1 J1 J2 SW16 12 34 O N 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 3 4 O N 12 34 O N 123 4 O N 12 34 O N 12 3 4 O N 56 78 12 34 [...]

  • Page 869

    QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 869 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service changes Once the QPC841 QSDI card has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configur ed to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions fo r running the Configuration Reco[...]

  • Page 870

    Page 870 of 894 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Applications The QPD841 Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) card is used to connect the switch to a variety of communication d evices and peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to any of the four serial ports. The standard applicatio[...]

  • Page 871

    QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 871 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation • SDI multiple-port cable (inter nal system options use only) —N T 8 D 9 0 • SDI I/O to DTE/DCE cables (system options use only) —N T 8 D 9 5 Note: This cable is available in dif ferent lengths. Refer to Equipment Identif ication (553-3001-154) [...]

  • Page 872

    Page 872 of 894 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 873

    Page 873 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 888 The TDS/DTR card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 874

    Page 874 of 894 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Features Tone transmitter The TDS/DTR tone transmitter provides 30 channels of tone transmission. Up to 256 tones are available as u-La w or A-Law and up to 256 bursts and cadences are downloaded from the CPU. The TDS/DTR card does not provide the Music on Hold feature as do[...]

  • Page 875

    The TDS/DTR card Page 875 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Tones and cadences The following tables give the tones and cadences provid ed by the NTAK03 TDS/DTR card. T abl e 273 NT AK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-La w tones and cadence (Part 1 of 6) To n e # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload Precision Ringing To n e s DTMF Digits MF Digit[...]

  • Page 876

    Page 876 of 894 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 19 770/1340 -12/-10 5 20 770/1480 -12/-10 6 21 850/1210 -12/-10 7 22 850/1340 -12/-10 8 23 850/1480 -12/-10 9 24 940/1340 -12/-10 0 25 940/1210 -12/-10 * 26 940/1480 -12/-10 # 27 700/1630 -12/-10 Fo 28 770/1630 -12/-10 F 29 850/1630 -12/-10 I 30 reser ved 31 reser ved 32 res[...]

  • Page 877

    The TDS/DTR card Page 877 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 39 770/1210 -17/-15 4 40 770/1340 -17/-15 5 41 770/1480 -17/-15 6 42 850/1210 -17/-15 7 43 850/1340 -17/-15 8 44 850/1480 -17/-15 9 45 940/1340 -17/-15 0 46 940/1210 -17/-15 * 47 940/1480 -17/-15 # 48 700/1630 -17/-15 Fo 49 770/1630 -17/-15 F 50 850/1630 -17/-15 I 51 reser v[...]

  • Page 878

    Page 878 of 894 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 60 700/1500 -13/-13 7 61 900/1500 -13/-13 8 62 1100/1500 -13/-13 9 63 700/1700 -13/-13 ST3P/RB/ C11 64 900/1700 -13/-13 STP/C12 65 1100/1700 -13/-13 KP/CR/KP1 66 1300/1700 -13/-13 ST2P/KP2 67 1500/1700 -13/-13 ST/CC 68 400 -11 ÷ 69 400 -14 ÷ 70 400 x 50 -14 ÷ 71 (533 + 66[...]

  • Page 879

    The TDS/DTR card Page 879 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 80 480 -19 ÷ 81 420 -9 ÷ 82 440 -29 ÷ 83 reser ved 84 350/440 -17/-17 ÷ 85 400/450 -17/-17 ÷ 86 400 -17 ÷ 87 1400 -26 ÷ 88 950 -12 ÷ 89 1400 -12 ÷ 90 1800 -12 ÷ 91 470 0 ÷ 92 940 0 ÷ 93 1300 0 ÷ 94 1500 0 ÷ 95 1880 0 ÷ 96 350/440 -10/-10 97 TBD 98 TBD 99 TBD 1[...]

  • Page 880

    Page 880 of 894 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Note: Tones #1 - 16 (i nclusive) and #234 - 24 9 (inclusive) are included for Norwegian and Malaysian specifications. 101 600 -19 ÷ 102 800 -19 ÷ 103 1400 -23 ÷ 104 820 -7 Ta b l e 2 7 4 NT AK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (P art 1 of 9) To n e # Frequenc[...]

  • Page 881

    The TDS/DTR card Page 881 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 12 940 X 1210 -14/-13 * 13 940 X 1480 -14/-13 # 14 700 X 1630 -14/-13 F0 15 770 X 1630 -14/-13 F 16 850 X 1630 -14/-13 I 17 1400 -37 89 940/1630 -13/-12 P 90 700/1210 -13/-12 1 91 700/1340 -13/-12 2 92 700/1480 -13/-12 3 93 770/1210 -13/-12 4 94 770/1340 -13/-12 5 95 770/148[...]

  • Page 882

    Page 882 of 894 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 104 850/1630 -13/-12 I 105 350/440 -17/-17 ÷ 106 400/450 -17/-17 ÷ 107 1400 -26 ÷ 108 440 -23 ÷ 109 420 -9 ÷ 110 950 -12 ÷ 111 1400 -12 ÷ 112 1800 -12 ÷ 113 940/1630 -12/-10 P 114 700/1210 -12/-10 1 115 700/1340 -12/-10 2 116 700/1480 -12/-10 3 117 770/1210 -12/-10 4[...]

  • Page 883

    The TDS/DTR card Page 883 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 125 940/1480 -12/-10 # 126 700/1630 -12/-10 F0 127 770/1630 -12/-10 F 128 850/1630 -12/-10 I 129 350/440 -22/-22 ÷ 130 400 -19 ÷ 131 400 -25 ÷ 132 400/450 -22/-22 ÷ 133 1400 -15 ÷ 134 950 -19 ÷ 135 1400 -20 ÷ 136 1800 -20 ÷ 137 420 -19 ÷ 138 940/1630 -18/-17 P 139 7[...]

  • Page 884

    Page 884 of 894 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 146 850/1340 -18/-17 ÷ 8 147 850/1480 -18/-17 ÷ 9 148 940/1340 -18/-17 ÷ 0 149 940/1210 -18/-17 ÷ * 150 940/1480 -18/-17 ÷ # 151 700/1630 -18/-17 F0 152 770/1630 -18/-17 F 153 850/1630 -18/-17 I 154 (533 + 666) X 10 -23 ÷ 155 (533 + 666) X 20 -23 ÷ 156 400 -12 ÷ 157 [...]

  • Page 885

    The TDS/DTR card Page 885 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 167 1700 -19 ÷ 168 440 -14 ÷ 169 380 -8 ÷ 170 1400 -32 ÷ 171 820 -7 P 172 850 -8 1 173 420 -32 2 174 reser ved 3 175 420 -6 4 176 420 -2 5 177 1020 -13 6 178 1800 -17 7 179 1400 -23 8 180 950 -29 9 181 1400 -29 0 182 1800 -29 * 183 950 -22 # 184 470 0 F0 185 940 0 F 186 [...]

  • Page 886

    Page 886 of 894 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 188 420 X 25 -17 189 950 -16 190 950 -25 191 940/1630 -9/-7 192 700/1210 -9/-7 193 700/1340 -9/-7 194 700/1480 -9/-7 195 770/1210 -9/-7 196 770/1340 -9/-7 197 770/1480 -9/-7 198 850/1210 -9/-7 199 850/1340 -9/-7 200 850/1480 -9/-7 201 940/1340 -9/-7 202 940/1210 -9/-7 203 94[...]

  • Page 887

    The TDS/DTR card Page 887 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 209 420 -4 210 1400 -18 211 1400 -9 212 350/420 -9/-9 213 420 -14 214 450 -12 215 450 -22 216 820 -16 217 350/420 -14/-14 218 940/1630 -14/-12 219 700/1210 -14/-12 220 700/1340 -14/-12 221 700/1480 -14/-12 222 770/1210 -14/-12 223 770/1340 -14/-12 224 770/1480 -14/-12 225 85[...]

  • Page 888

    Page 888 of 894 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 230 940/1480 -14/-12 231 700/1630 -14/-12 232 770/1630 -14/-12 233 850/1630 -14/-12 234 940 X 1630 -17/-15 p 235 700 X 1210 -17/-15 1 236 700 X 1340 -17/-15 2 237 700 X 1480 -17/-15 3 238 770 X 1210 -17/-15 4 239 770 X 1340 -17/-15 5 240 770 X 1480 -17/-15 6 241 850 X 1210 -[...]

  • Page 889

    Page 889 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation 894 Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 890

    Page 890 of 894 Appendix A: LAPB Da ta Link Control protocol 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 LAPB subset of the HDLC protocol and transm itted serially to the line at a rate determined by the download ed parameters. The QPC513 card receives data serially from the line, packaged in LAPB information frames. Afte r determining th at a block [...]

  • Page 891

    Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol Page 891 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation LAPB balanced class of procedure Applications which use ports on the QPC513 are automatically designate d as BAC, 2, 8 (for examp le, balanced operation, asynchro nous balanced mode class of procedure with optional functi ons 2 and 8 implemented). [...]

  • Page 892

    Page 892 of 894 Appendix A: LAPB Da ta Link Control protocol 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004 Asynchronous Ba lanced Mode Asynchronous Balanced Mode (ABM) is a balanced, configured operational mode in which either combined statio n may send commands at any time and may initiate certain response fram e transmissions wi thout receiving permi[...]

  • Page 893

    Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol Page 893 of 894 Circuit Card Description and Installation Description of procedure The basic LAPB procedures must be implemented to satisfy the following: • standard use of the poll/final bit (for more information, see ISO-4375-1979-[E]) • exception condition reporting and recovery implemented in acco[...]

  • Page 894

    Page 894 of 894 Appendix A: LAPB Da ta Link Control protocol 553-3001-211 Standard 2.00 September 2004[...]

  • Page 895

    [...]

  • Page 896

    F amily Product Manual Contact s Copyright FCC not ice T rademar ks Document number Pr oduct release Document re lease Date P ublish Nor tel Networks Communication Ser ver 1000 Cir cuit Car d Description and Installation Copyright © 2003—2004 Nor tel Networks All Rights Reserved Information is subject to change without notice. Nor tel Networks r[...]